Greek

Read Greek in 30 Days (or less): New Testament, Old Testament, Apocrypha, Philo, Church
Fathers
© Copyright 2000, 2002, 2006 and 2011 by W. Larry Richards

Second Printing, with corrections and revisions, 2012
Publisher: Breakthrough Books Company, Berrien Springs, Michigan 49103
Printer: Patterson Printing, Benton Harbor, MI
All rights reserved. Other than brief citations, any use of the content of this book in any form must
have written approval of the publisher.
Publisher’s Website: www.breakthrubooks.com

Author’s Website: www.andrews.edu/~larryr
Email: larryr@andrews.edu
Layout: Thomas Toews

Cover Design: Robert N. Mason
ISBN 0-9778431-0-6
Preface to the Second Edition
This second edition has three major changes. One, tables are provided in the Appendices
that contain full conjugations and declensions with their translations. The first edition
often gave just the first person singular (for verbs) or the nominative and genitive singular
forms (for declensions) because it was assumed that the remaining forms would be obvious
if the minimum was mastered. It became clear, however, that students wanted to see the
complete form if only for confirmation purposes.
Two, the title of the book reflects the second change. “Read Greek...” instead of “Read
New Testament Greek...” This new title is followed with a subtitle that includes the New
Testament as prominent but with other passages based on Koine Greek.
New Testament Greek belongs to the large family of Koine Greek and, therefore, samplings
of the Koine Greek are given in Appendix C, replacing Mark 3. The passages selected for
this appendix are taken from the Old Testament, the Apocrypha, Philo and the Apostolic
Fathers.
Since most students taking Greek want to learn to read the New Testament in Greek,
the Lessons remain essentially the same and are, therefore, built on the New Testament.
Studying the passages in Appendix C, however, will provide confidence for those who wish
to use Koine Greek beyond the New Testament.
Three, an INDEX is provided, primarily to assist students who want to quickly review a
form or definition without having to do a prolonged search in pages already covered.
Minor changes include corrections and modifications: typos, consistency in referencing,
and elimination of words or clauses in the practice exercises that could be construed as
insensitive or that might be seen as making a subtle theological point. These have been
changed.
I wish to personally assure students, and teachers, for that matter, that it is not wishful
thinking to believe Beginning Greek can be learned in less than 30 days. I teach Beginning
Greek to seminary students on a regular schedule each summer in eleven class periods
(over approximately 24 days) with a 100 percent success rate, and over 50 percent of these
students are taking Greek for the first time. These same students then take Intermediate
Greek in eleven class periods and pass a standardized test that is not prepared by me with
a 95-100 percent success rate.
April 5, 2012
v
Preface to the First Edition
The title of the book has an audacious ring.1 The book, however, is not designed to cover
beginning Greek in the traditional sense. Greek grammar that is important only for the
linguist is bypassed.
Most persons who want to learn NT Greek never intend to become specialists in the
language. They want to know how NT Greek can benefit them in practical ways, and this
includes students enrolled in a seminary or Bible college. Also, many persons who sit in
the pew would like to work with the original text, and for them this approach works.
For more than 35 years I shrugged off the requests of my students urging me to write this
textbook because I did not want to become just another teacher of beginning Greek who
believed his method is superior to all others.
So, why have I decided to enter the arena now? The pressing influence of students.
Students, who had taken Greek at the undergraduate level in colleges and seminaries all
over the world and were doing Greek again in my classes, sometimes as much as 25 years
from their first exposure, insisted that I make the material available in published form.
These students repeatedly stated that the techniques I use really do make a difference, not
only by making Greek easy, but by making the learning of Greek enjoyable.
The intended audience includes students taking beginning Greek for the first time—either
as the main textbook, or as a supplement to a conventional textbook,2 pastors who want
to do a crash “brush–up,” and laypersons who would like to get the basics in the easiest
way possible.
In the attempt to make progress rewarding as quickly as possible, the exercises are based on
the Greek New Testament very early in the book. Even the first exercises that I created are
made up of words and concepts found in the New Testament.
My method is a “building block” scheme. This eliminates the need to learn a large
1. A look at the suggested schedule in Appendix A shows how I do this. I teach beginning Greek year after year, following
this schedule. This is also the case for the graduate students who help teach beginning Greek in the seminary where I work. For
many years I have used this textbook as the sole source for learning beginning Greek.
2. For those who would like more information than I give, many standard grammars are helpful. To mention a widely used
and excellent text: William D. Mounce, Basics of Biblical Greek (Grand Rapids, Zondervan Publishing House, 2003). Mounce
shares some of the same concerns I express. Another textbook that has been well received is by N. Clayton Croy, A Primer of
Biblical Greek (Grand Rapids, Eerdmans Publishing Company, 1999). For a good representative of the traditional approach, see
Sakae Kubo, A Beginner’s New Testament Greek Grammar (Lanham, MD, University Press of America, 1979).
vi
and seemingly unending number of tables of declensions and conjugations given in most
textbooks. Because so many grammatical constructions in Greek are repeated, either
identically or in modified form, the shared features of these forms are emphasized so that
the amount of memorization is immensely reduced. For example, my first “Minimum”
consists of three sets of endings that cover the endings for 43 forms.
I am sure many teachers use some of these methods in their teaching in various, and possibly
more effective, forms. But it is because no one has published these simple techniques that
this volume is produced. My hope is that this abbreviated approach to reading NT Greek
will advance the use of Greek for making the New Testament clearer and more effective
from the pulpit, in the classroom, or for private study.
Appreciation and acknowledgments: Elena Toews and Ross Winkle, two graduate assistants
at Andrews University who used the manuscript as their textbook for the beginning
Greek course they taught, have given many helpful suggestions. Dorothy M. Richards
helped make the English clearer in many sentences. Leona Running provided invaluable
proofreading. Clinton Wahlen, a former student of mine, gave input that is indispensable.
His reading of the manuscript while using it as the textbook in the classes he teaches in the
Philippines made his suggestions and corrections all the more practical.
Belated thanks are extended to my students from four decades who offered comments and
continually urged me to produce this small volume.
vii
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .vi
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xi
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Lesson 1
The Greek Alphabet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Koine Greek and Its Importance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
The Greek Alphabet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Comparisons with English Alphabet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Pronunciation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Vocabulary Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Lesson 2
Grammar Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Major Parts of Speech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Gender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Key Term: Declension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Key Term: Conjugation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Key Term: Parse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Lesson 3
Minimum One: Endings of the First and Second Declensions . . . . 19
Vocabulary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Endings of the First and Second Declensions . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Minimum One . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
The Definite Article . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Use of Pronouns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Use of Adjectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
ix
Lesson 4
Minimum Two: Endings of the Third Declension . . . . . . . . . . 33
Introduction to the Third Declension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Vocabulary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
The Verb “to be” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Third Declension Endings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Minimum Two . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Application Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Lesson 5
Minimum Three: The Four Basic Verb Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Vocabulary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
The Verb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Tense in the Indicative Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Minimum Three: The Four Basic Verb Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
The Aorist Tense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
The Infinitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Lesson 6
Minimums Four and Five: Tense Identifiers
and Their Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Vocabulary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Minimum Four: Tense Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Minimum Five: Applying the Tense Identifiers to the Basic Four . . 62
Table: English Translations of Indicative Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Contract Verbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Lesson 7
Minimum Six: The Participle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Vocabulary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
x
Introduction to the Participle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Minimum Six-A: The Active Voice Participle . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Minimum Six-B: The Middle/Passive Voice Participle. . . . . . . . 81
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Lesson 8
Minimum Seven: Subjunctive and Imperative Modes . . . . . . . . 85
Vocabulary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Introduction to the Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Minimum Seven-A: Subjunctive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Minimum Seven-B: Imperative Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Translating the Subjunctive and Imperative Modes . . . . . . . . . 95
More Information on Infinitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
The “copycat” 2 aorist continued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Lesson 9
Minimum Eight: The –μι Verb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Vocabulary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Introduction to the –μι Verb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Minimum Eight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Summary of –μι Verb Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Principal Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Lesson 10
Basic Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
The Genitive Absolute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
The Accusative of General Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Conditional sentences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
xi
Appendices
A. A Suggested Study Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
B. Key to Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
C. Supplementary Exercises in Koine Greek . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Isaiah 61:1-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Apocrypha: Tobit 13:5-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Philo “On Creation” III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Didache 9:7-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
1 Clement 22:1-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
D. Declensions of Some Pronouns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
E. Adjectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
F. Conjugations: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Regular verb: using λυω . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Imperfect tense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Present tense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Future tense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Aorist tense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Perfect tense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
The verb “to be” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
The Pluperfect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
G. Frequencies of Word Occurrences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
H. Syntax Examples for Lesson 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
The Genitive Absolute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
The Accusative of General Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Conditional Sentences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
I. Parsing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
J. Palatals, Labials, Dentals and Liquids . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
K. Glossary of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
L. The Eight Minimums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
M. 300 Basic Vocabulary Words—Alphabetized . . . . . . . . . .183
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
xii
Introduction
The Approach. The method of this book is built around what I have labeled the “Eight
Minimums.” These “Eight Minimums” make up the core of material upon which the bulk
of NT Greek grammar is built. They give you the heart of Koine Greek grammar in an
incredibly abbreviated, but workable, form. Each minimum is highlighted in red.
Instead of repeatedly learning a new form as conventionally presented, you discover that
the form is not “new”—you will recognize it from one of the Minimums. The only way the
method used in this book will work is to thoroughly master the eight “Minimums.”
Once the alphabet is mastered, these eight Minimums can actually be learned in eight
concentrated hours. The eight “Minimums” are given in Appendix L along with a brief
introductory section pointing out the value of each Minimum.
Vocabulary. In the vocabulary section of each lesson, the word list is divided into parts.
The purpose for doing this is to give a shorter list which can be learned in one study session.
The parts correspond with the exercises, so that the words in Part A may be used for the
exercises in Part I. The vocabulary is made easier and even enjoyable both by pointing out
all of the words you already know and by showing you a multitude of English derivatives
that help you remember the new definition.
The English definition column gives you the following information:
t Variations of meaning in the gender (e.g., he, [it], she / someone, [something]).
t Thus, for the neuter gender, both the Greek and its definition are given in brackets.
The definition of the neuter gender is illustrated in the previous point.
t When the definition is a direct English derivative, the definition will be given in
bold print.
t English words that are derived from the Greek word are given in brackets.
Suggestions for Study

Schedule
t A suggested “30 Days” schedule is given in Appendix A. This schedule is basically
the one I have used for many years in teaching beginning Greek. It involves two
lectures and one lab session per week for seminary students taking a regular class
xiii
load during the semester. The book is completed after 26 50–minute lectures. [For
summer “intensives,” I cover the book in 11 days, 150 minutes per day.]
t In this schedule, you are reading from a modified New Testament after seven
lectures, modified, in that vocabulary helps are provided for words that occur less
than 50 times in the New Testament and grammatical forms are altered to match
your progress.
t The schedule may be modified very easily for those who wish to accelerate the pace.
For example, I cover this entire book in TWO hours each August for incoming
students who have taken Greek sometime in the past and need to pass a placement
examination.
t For those learning the language strictly on your own, it is critically important to
keep to any schedule you set for yourself. It is easy to be distracted. If you fall
behind, though, remember, you are in charge, and a “stick to it” attitude will reap
valuable rewards.
Techniques
t Memorization: Because the amount of memorization is drastically reduced in this
approach, it is imperative that what is required (the eight Minimums) be thoroughly
mastered.
It is an established fact that physical involvement in memorization enhances the
learning process immensely, so give close attention to the suggestions given below.
t Vocabulary
1. Write down each Greek word from a new lesson on lined paper, one word per
line. Fold the paper in the middle and then write the English definition on the
right side of the vertical crease.
2. In a quiet place where you can “pace” back and forth and speak out loud, be-
gin by doing five words at a time. When you have the first five learned, add
another five, doing the previous five, ten, fifteen, etc., as well. Repeat until list
is done.
The Association Factor. Just as a person knows when listening to a music re-
cording what the next song will be before it begins, so will this approach assist
in learning the next word.
xiv
3. Once the words are learned from the list via association, they can be placed on
cards and mixed.
t Words that are easily recalled should be placed in a separate pile, so that those
words which continue to be difficult will get more attention.
t Words that keep being confused with one another should be placed side by side
and some little device created that will eliminate the confusion.
For example. In 1958, the year I took beginning Greek, I had trouble with “meno” (μένω) and
“mello” (μέλλω), not remembering which definition went with which word. The difficulty
ended when I said to myself: “meno” (μένω) means “remain,” thus: the little minnows
“remain” with the mama fish—confusion eliminated. Do not be afraid to create a “crazy”
device that will make the learning easier.
Note: For persons learning in a group setting, a classroom, for example, study
with one or more persons if possible. If you are good at languages, helping
someone who is struggling will help both of you. The verbal exchanges are
part of the valuable “physical” involvement. Studies show that “teaching”
yields the highest level of retention—and this is a very “physical” involvement.
t Forms: Follow the same suggestions on memorizing mentioned for vocabulary.

The most important activity here, though, is to immediately transfer the learned
forms to the New Testament Greek. There is no value in knowing the few forms
required if that information cannot be applied to the text.
t Review previous lessons. Every few days, go back to previous lessons and review.
This is not only important for those who are doing the “30 days” at a fast pace, but
also for those spreading the study over ten or more weeks. Repetition is the key to
retention.
Repetition. You will find many points stated several times. Years of teaching make it clear
that helpful tips, regardless of how often stated and even demonstrated, take a while to
register.
Special Boxes. Because I wanted to keep all of the material in a table together, it was
sometimes necessary to go to a new page. This left blank space on the previous page. In
these places, as well as on the final page of a lesson where there was room, I inserted a box
with information about the Bible, “Did You Know ...”
xv
Abbreviations
Acc. Accusative
Adj. Adjective
Adv. Adverb
Aor. Aorist
Cf. Compare
Dat. Dative
Fut. Future
Gen. Genitive
Ind. Indicative
Mid. Middle (voice)
M/P Middle/Passive (voice)
NT New Testament
Pass. Passive (voice)
Perf. Perfect tense
Per. Person
Pl. Plural
Pro. Pronoun
Subj. Subjunctive
xvi
Lesson
1 The Greek
Alphabet
In This Lesson:
► Koine Greek and Its Importance
► The Greek Alphabet
► Comparisons With English Alphabet
► Pronunciation
► Vocabulary Building
► Exercises
2 LESSON 1
PART ONE: Koine Greek and Its Importance

New Testament Greek belongs to the large language family known as the Indo–European
languages—whose history can be followed from the 14th century BC to the present day, and
includes such languages as Latin and all the Latin derivatives, plus German and English.
Greek documents cover 34 centuries, a longer period of time than that of any other Indo–
European language.
The terms “classical,” “koine,” and “modern” are often confused. “Classical,” in its broadest sense,
covers both the ancient period (pre–Homer and Homer), the time of Plato and Aristotle, the
Hellenistic and Roman period, the Byzantine period, and everything else up to the modern period
that began in the 15th century. In some circles, however, “classical” refers exclusively to Homer and
the great philosophers who followed his time (the distinctions being between the Attic and the
Doric, with the Koine being a developed and simplified form of the Attic).
New Testament Greek, known as Koine Greek, is the Greek that was used from the time
of Alexander the Great (4th century BC) through the end of the great Roman Empire (5th
century AD)—a period of Greek that is also known as the Greek of the Hellenistic and
Roman periods.
Western Rome came to an end in 476 AD, and that date is considered to be the beginning of the
Byzantine Greek. Some scholars see the end of the “Koine” period in 529 when Justinian closed
the Athenian schools of philosophy. From that time on, the Koine was used mostly by the church
and thus became identified as “Byzantine Greek.” Apart from the ecclesiastical influence that
dominated the Koine Greek in this period (and even earlier when Constantine made Christianity
the state religion), the Koine Greek existed in a broader sense until the 15th century.
It is, therefore, the Greek of the Old Testament translation from Hebrew (Septuagint,
3rd century BC), of Philo (an Alexandrian Jewish apologist contemporary with Jesus),
Josephus, the New Testament, the Apostolic Fathers, and the Greek–speaking Anti–Nicene
Church Fathers.
PART TWO: The Greek Alphabet

The Greek alphabet is the same alphabet used today in Greece. As you begin learning the
Greek alphabet, keep the following point in mind: the alphabet is not difficult—it is very
similar to the English alphabet.
The Greek Alphabet 3
NAME FORM SOUND
Small Caps
alpha α Α a father
beta β Β b boy
gamma γ Γ g game
delta δ Δ d dog
epsilon ε Ε e etch
zeta ζ Ζ z daze
eta η Η e obey
theta θ Θ th theology
iota ι Ι i immediate
kappa κ Κ k keep
lamda λ Λ l lamb
mu μ Μ m mother
nu ν Ν n now
xi ξ Ξ x lax
omicron ο Ο o omelet
pi π Π p papa
rho ρ Ρ r rose
sigma σ, ς Σ s same
tau τ Τ t take
upsilon υ Υ u tulip
phi φ Φ ph phone
chi χ Χ ch crisis
psi ψ Ψ ps tops
omega ω Ω o told
This is the conventional order. Capital letters need not be learned at this time; they are
picked up quite naturally because many of the capitals are more like the English letter than
the cursive form and the remaining letters are easy to pick up by simply sounding out the
remaining letters in the word.
4 LESSON 1
PART THREE: Comparisons with the English Alphabet

Most persons look at the Greek script and conclude, “It’s all Greek to me.” This common
expression in itself has created the notion that Greek is difficult. This misconception needs
to be dispelled.
Here are the key features of the Greek alphabet:
1. The Greek alphabet has 24 letters (compared with the English alphabet which has
26 letters).
2. Eleven of the letters in the Greek alphabet are already known because they are
almost identical to English letters, even in their appearance.
3. Five letters have the same sound as English even though the form of the letter is
different.
4. Six letters of the Greek alphabet look like an English letter but are completely
different. Tricky! These tricky letters are false friends. More attention should
be given to these six letters simply because clarity on these letters makes it
much easier to work quickly with the new alphabet.
5. The remaining three Greek letters are new to us, in terms of both sound and
form.
This is a breakdown of these features:
Similarities with English
1. Similar sound and form (11 of the 24 letters)
α a
β b (compare the capital B)
δ d
ε e
ζ z
ι i
κ k
ο o
ς s (as a final letter; an “s” within the word: σ = κόσμος = kosmos)
τ t
υ u
2. Similar in sound, but different in form1
θ th
λ l
π p
φ ph
False Friends
These letters have a similar sound to an English letter, and even look like an English letter.
But the letter means something completely different. As noted, these six letters deserve
more attention and will save you many hours of confusion if the differences are identified
with precision at the outset.
γ g (not the English y)
η long “a” (not the English n)— transliterated as an “e” with a line above it
μ m (not the English u)
ν n (not the English v)
ρ r (not the English p)
ω o (not the English w)
Completely new in form but not foreign to English sounds
ξ Our “x” as the “x” in lax
χ Our “k” with a guttural sound as the “ch” in Loch Ness
ψ Our “p” combined with an “s” as the “ps” in tops
1. In actual pronunciation, however, there is an additional letter, the letter “h” that appears over the first letter(s) of Greek words
in the form of a single opening quotation mark. See below under “breathing marks.”
6 LESSON 1
PART FOUR: Pronunciation
The Diphthong
Important information about the diphthong:
1. A diphthong is defined as two vowels next to each other that are treated as one.
t An example from the English may be seen in the word “group. “ There are two
vowels side by side in this word: the “o” and the “u.” But we treat them as one
(a diphthong), giving them the sound of the “oo” rather than “oh–oo.” 2
2. In the majority of words in the Greek NT, two vowels side by side are
diphthongs.
3. The most frequently used diphthongs in the New Testament, with their
pronunciation, are:3
αι pronounced as “ai” in aisle.
αυ pronounced as “ou” in out.
ει pronounced as the “ei” in eight
ευ pronounced as “eu” in feud
οι pronounced as “oi” in oil
ου pronounced as “ou” in group
υι pronounced as “we”
The following verse from the New Testament (Matthew 11:2) is used to demonstrate the
diphthong:
Ὁ δὲ Ἰωάννης ἀκούσας ἐν τῷ δεσμωτηρίῳ τὰ ἔργα τοῦ Χριστοῦ πέμψας
διὰ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ
In this verse, we may observe the following:
2. In those cases where the two vowels that are ordinarily a diphthong have a separate pronunciation, a mark known as the
dieresis (two horizontal dots) is placed over the second vowel. In these cases the two vowels are pronounced separately. Μωϋσῆς
example (over the “ϋ”).
3. When an accent falls on a syllable with a diphthong, the accent is placed over the second vowel. Note, too, that except for the
last one in the list, all of these diphthongs look and sound just like English diphthongs.
1. There is a diphthong in the word ἀκούσας.
2. Two examples of two vowels side by side that are not a diphthong would be
the words Ἰωάννης and διὰ. [Ἰωάννης actually has three vowels at the
beginning of the word, and each of them is pronounced separately, with the third
vowel joining with the following consonant, the first of two consonants: ν.]
3. Another form of the diphthong is the so–called “iota subscript.”
t In many instances the final iota of a word is written as a subscripted letter, that
is, below the preceding vowel.
t In such cases the following diphthongs, αι, ηι, and ωι, actually appear in NT
Greek as follows: ᾳ ῃ ῳ respectively. These three instances are always found
in predictable places for words that are declined, discussed below.
t In these cases, the “iota” below the vowel is ignored so far as pronunciation is
concerned. It is important, however, for translation because the subscripted
“iota” gives meaning to the word.
t An example of the “iota–subscript” diphthong is also found in the same verse:
δεσμωτηρίῳ (the final two letters).
The Accent Mark and Syllable

Some preliminary observations.
t Just as in all languages, words have one or more syllables, and in words with more
than one syllable we accent one of the syllables.
t For example, in English the word “book” is a one–syllable word and there is no
need to show an accent.
t However, in the word “concern” we have two syllables (con and cern) in which we
place the accent or emphasis on the second syllable.
t We learn where the accent goes without any indication in the writing of the word.
In Greek, however, the syllable to be accented is not left to guesswork; we are told where
the accent is with an actual mark that appears over the accented syllable, and although that
accent mark appears in three forms, the meaning is the same.4
4. In ancient Greek, however, the accents showed some inflectional characteristics (rising, falling, and rising and falling together:
acute, grave, and circumflex, respectively).
8 LESSON 1
Accent Marks
The three forms of the Greek accent are shown in the verse previously cited from Matthew
11:2:
1. acute: third word in the sentence (Ιωάννης);
2. grave: second word in the verse: (δὲ); and
3. circumflex: tenth and eleventh words in the verse: (τοῦ Χριστοῦ).
Even in one–syllable words we find an accent (as is the case for the second word δὲ).
Exercise: identify all of the accents in the verse.
Ὁ δὲ Ἰωάννης ἀκούσας ἐν τῷ δεσμωτηρίῳ τὰ ἔργα τοῦ Χριστοῦ
πέμψας διὰ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ.
Many beginning grammars, particularly the older ones, give a detailed explanation for the
rules of accents; however, this information is unimportant when it comes to understanding the
translation of the NT Greek.
Here are some observations about accents:
t The rules of accenting are important for linguists, but not for the practical
application of the text.
t Accents would be important if one needed to write and converse in the language.
t For those wishing to read the Greek, the location of the accents is already done,
and we do not wish to contest their location!
t The practical value is easy: when pronouncing a Greek word, simply accent the
syllable that has one of the three accent marks already provided and joyfully bypass
all the detailed rules that govern accenting.5
Syllables
ONE, and only one, very basic rule: Divide a word’s syllables immediately following a
vowel6 unless there are two consonants following, in which case the first of the two consonants
is added to the preceding vowel.
5. I first became aware of the unimportance of accents when I collated 81 Greek manuscripts in 1972 for my dissertation;
it was clear that accents were of no value whatsoever in determining the value of a manuscript, its impact on a theological
interpretation, or its value in classification.
6. This includes the diphthong (two vowels treated as one), discussed above.
t Examples from the verse above where the accented syllable is in caps:
t between a vowel and a consonant: ἀ κού σας; (sounds like: ah KOU sas)
t when two consonants exist side by side and the first one is connected to the
preceding vowel: πέμ ψας. (sounds like: PEM psas).
t The long word in the verse above would be divided, according to our two guidelines,
as follows: δεσ μω τη ρί ῳ = des moe tay REE oh—in which the letters in caps
represent the accented syllable.
Application
Apply the guidelines on syllable divisions and accents and pronounce the following three
Greek words. The accented syllable is in caps or underlined.
νόμος law (NA–mas:7 (nomenclature and Deuteronomy, second book of
the law)
Χριστός Christ (Chris–TOS)
ἀπόστολος apostle (a–POS–to–los)
t For the first word, νομος, a division between a vowel and a consonant applies = (νο
μος), as indicated in the transliteration.8
t For the next word, Χριστός, the two consonants (σ τ) call for a split. The first
is attached to the preceding vowel, and the final syllable begins with the second
consonant τ = (Χριστός).
The Breathing Mark

Greek words that begin with a vowel or diphthong (two vowels treated as one sound)
always have a breathing mark. The breathing mark goes over any word beginning with a
vowel and over the second letter of a diphthong.
Here is important information about the breathing mark:
7. The omicron should be pronounced like the alpha solely for the purpose of assisting the student to distinguish between the two
“o” vowels (omicron and omega).
8. The term “transliteration” means giving the equivalent letter in another language; in this case, what the Greek would be in
English letters. Two letters in Greek have a horizontal line across the top in transliteration to English to distinguish between
similar letters: the “e” for eta and “o” for omega.
10 LESSON 1
t The mark is either smooth or rough. Only the rough breathing mark is important,
for it is our letter “h.”
t These two marks can be seen in our Matthew verse.
t When a word begins with a vowel or diphthong, the smooth breathing mark is
indicated by a single close–quote sign (’) over the initial vowel or second letter of a
diphthong. Examples: the mark over the first letter in: ἀκούσας ἐν.
t The rough breathing mark is indicated by a single open–quote sign (‘) over the
initial vowel/diphthong or ρ. The first word in the verse is an example: Ὁ.
t The meaning of these marks is:
t Smooth breathing marks can be ignored
t Rough breathing marks represent the English “h” and are, therefore, very
important.
t Thus, the first word in Matthew 11:2 is pronounced “HA.”
Ὁ δὲ Ἰωάννης ἀκούσας ἐν τῷ δεσμωτηρίῳ τὰ ἔργα τοῦ Χριστοῦ πέμψας
διὰ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ.
Remember...
t Diphthongs are two vowels pronounced as one vowel.
t Iota subscripts are important for translation purposes, but not for pronunciation.
t Accent marks should only be used to help pronounce a word—they have no value
in interpretation or proclamation.9
t Only the “rough” breathing mark is important since it is the letter “h.”
PART FIVE: Vocabulary Building

Many Greek words are known to you by simply pronouncing the Greek word aloud.
For example, such words as “architect,” “allegory,” “enigma,” “Galilee” etc., will become
immediately evident. Repeat: you already know far more than you could have imagined! In
addition to the words you know by simply saying the words aloud, you must master all
9. Within the NT the accent or absence of the accent gives us clarity in single letter words (η) and in the case of two pronouns
spelled the same way apart from accent. As we will see, though, these exceptions are minor because context resolves the issue.
words that occur in the New Testament fifty times or more. There are 300 of these words
and the vocabulary assignments within this book (Lessons Three to Nine) include these
300 words—many of which are direct loan words.
The entire list is given alphabetically in Appendix M. A key point, though, for the
observant student, is that one can find that these 300 are quickly expanded without any
further memorization by simply combining known words to form another word that may
only occur once in the NT.
To illustrate this point, consider two words that occur more than 50 times in the New
Testament: σύν (together) and δοῦλος (servant).
t When these two known words are joined to form a new word that occurs less
than fifty times, its definition can be figured out: συνδοῦλος (fellow servant)—a
word that occurs only ten times.
t Additional examples will be given of this phenomenon once you begin the exercises
in Lesson 5 where the exercises are based on the NT text. The hints are provided
within the exercises.
Another example as to how you may readily expand your vocabulary is to know that in
Greek, the letter “α“ in front of a word reverses the definition:10 gnostic/agnostic; theist/
atheist.
t These two examples are easy to recognize since they are words that come directly
into English.
t But, the same applies to words that will be new to you. For once you know, for
example, the Greek words for “ability” and “purity,” it is a simple deduction to
know that with Greek “α” in front of the Greek words, they become “inability”
and “impurity,” respectively, even though these words occur less than fifty times is
the NT.
Additional vocabulary can be expanded as time and contact with the Greek NT take place,
but the important point here is twofold: you know more words than you might think
by merely sounding out the word and by combining basic words with an added known
preposition or other prefix.
A very helpful collection of these Greek words that are brought right into the English language
is given in the first section of Mastering Greek Vocabulary by Thomas A. Robinson, Hendrickson
10. This “a” prefix effect occurs in English even with words that are not derived from Greek root words, such as: moral/amoral.
12 LESSON 1
Pub., 1991. An excellent book and all–round best on New Testament Greek vocabulary is the
well–organized and thorough record of all vocabulary words, including lists with helpful emphases,
by Warren C. Trenchard, Complete Vocabulary Guide to the Greek New Testament, Eerdmans, 1998.
Two other helpful books: (1) Sakae Kubo’s A Reader’s Greek–English Lexicon of the New Testament is
valuable for passage–by–passage assistance, providing vocabulary definitions according to the order
in which words occur within any given NT passage. Andrews University Press, 1979. (2) A standard
list of words from the NT beginning with those that occur over 500 times and descending in blocks
to words whose frequency is ten or more is Bruce Metzger’s Lexical Aids.
PART SIX: Exercises

Pronunciation: To readily recognize the Greek letters and the pronunciation of Greek
words, read aloud the following verses. Do not be concerned with translation; this is
possible after Lesson 5.
1 John 1:1 Ὃ ἦν ἀπ᾿ ἀρχῆς, ὃ ἀκηκόαμεν, ὃ ἑωράκαμεν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν,

ὃ ἐθεασάμεθα καὶ αἱ χεῖρες ἡμῶν ἐψηλάφησαν περὶ τοῦ λόγου τῆς ζωῆς 2
καὶ ἡ ζωὴ ἐφανερώθη, καὶ ἑωράκαμεν καὶ μαρτυροῦμεν καὶ ἀπαγγέλλομεν
ὑμῖν τὴν ζωὴν τὴν αἰώνιον ἥτις ἦν πρὸς τὸν πατέρα καὶ ἐφανερώθη ἡμῖν
3 ὃ ἑωράκαμεν καὶ ἀκηκόαμεν, ἀπαγγέλλομεν καὶ ὑμῖν, ἵνα καὶ ὑμεῖς
κοινωνίαν ἔχητε μεθ᾿ ἡμῶν. καὶ ἡ κοινωνία δὲ ἡ ἡμετέρα μετὰ τοῦ πατρὸς
καὶ μετὰ τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ.
Lesson
2 Grammar
Review
In This Lesson:
► Major Parts of Speech
► Gender
► Key Term: Declension
► Key Term: Conjugation
► Key Term: Parse
14 LESSON 2
[NOTE: Some will not need this “review.” It might be helpful, however, to check the
section on terms (declension, conjugation, etc.)] A glossary of terms is given in Appendix
K.
PART ONE: The Major Parts of Speech

The major parts of speech for the Greek language are the same as in English:
t Noun (covered in Lessons 3 and 4): a person, place, or thing (e.g., woman, house,
river, Mary, Jerusalem).
t Pronoun (covered in Lessons 3 and 4): a substitute for nouns (e.g., I, you, he, she,
it, we, you, they).
t Adjective (covered in Lessons 3 and 4): a modifier giving details about a noun or
pronoun (e.g., big, little, red, strong). Examples:
t A big house is on the corner. It is beautiful.
t (Whereas the word “it” is a pronoun—referring to the noun “house,” “beautiful”
is an adjective, telling us about the quality or characteristic of the “house”).
t Participle: (covered in Lesson 7): verbal adjectives (e.g., eating, running, seeing).
t Verb (covered in Lesson 5): action words (e.g., eat, run, see).
t Adverb: word used to modify a verb, adjective, or another adverb, expressing time,
manner, place, etc. Example:
t I strongly agree.
t Preposition: a small word showing relation or function to the word positioned
after it. Examples:
t The book on the table.
t She gave the book to him.
t Conjunctions: words that connect words and phrases. Examples:
t Jack and Jill went up the hill.
t We need an umbrella because it is raining.
Grammar Review 15
PART TWO: Gender
In English we have three genders, but the gender is recognized solely from the definition
and not by its form. For example: “boy” and “girl.”
t In Greek, as in most languages, the genders are recognized not only by definition
but also by a different spelling pattern.
t In English there is nothing in the spelling of “boy” and “girl” to help us know the
gender—this comes from the definition.
t In Greek, the spelling pattern used often tells us the gender.
t Certain letters are reserved in Greek to tell us the gender even if we might not
know the gender by definition.1
This is a practical point for translating Greek. Whereas we may have varying translations
for certain words (e.g., is the word “church” a “she” or an “it”?), this is never a problem in
Greek where the actual spelling usually tells us the word is feminine gender and thus there
is no need to guess. The exception to this is covered in Lesson 4.
When three forms of a word appear in vocabulary lists (as is the case for the four pronouns
below), the three variations in spelling are due to the three genders the word takes in Greek
(pronouns and adjectives). They are always the masculine, neuter, and feminine, in this
order. This order is discussed in the “NOTE” below.
Nouns have only one gender. Pronouns and adjectives have a form for all three genders
and are given side by side in the vocabulary lists. This becomes clear in Lesson 3.
NOTE: Whereas most Greek grammars use the order masculine, feminine, neuter in
vocabulary lists and declensions, in this grammar the neuter is given second because it
follows the same spelling pattern as the masculine. It is very simple to see the relationship
between the masculine and neuter genders when they are placed side by side. The neuter
varies from the masculine in just two places— this is discussed in Lesson 3.
Some important points about the Greek gender:
t As noted above, Greek nouns, pronouns and adjectives have gender (masculine,
neuter and feminine), and both pronouns and adjectives must agree in gender with
the noun to which they refer.
1. In the so–called third declension, covered in Lesson 4, the masculine and feminine do not have a separate spelling.
16 LESSON 2
t Since the word “house” in Greek is masculine, the word “big” in “the big house”
must also be masculine.
t When we refer to “house” with a pronoun, the pronoun must also be
masculine.
t Thus, “house” would be referred to as “he” in Greek even though we would
actually translate the word as “it” in English.
PART THREE: Declension.

The term “declension” applies to nouns, pronouns, adjectives and participles. These parts
of speech have varying functions within a sentence. For example: observe the difference of
the word house (a noun) in the following sentences:
t The house is near the city.
t The man went into the house.
t Lightning struck the house.
In each of these three sentences the word house is spelled exactly the same in English. In
each example, though, it has a different function.
t In the first sentence, the word house is the subject of the sentence.
t In the second sentence, the word house is the object of a preposition (man is the
subject), that is, “house” is the place referred to by the preposition “into.”
t In the third sentence, the word house is the direct object of the action in the verb
(lightning is the subject), that is, it tells us “what” was “struck.”
Whereas in English we know these functions by their context, in Greek, as with most
languages of the world, the different function in the sentence is also indicated by a modified
ending of the word.
When we list all the possible functions of a given Greek noun, we say that we have “declined”
the word (when we have declined a word, we have given its “declension”). In each form
of the word within the declension, the spelling usually changes. In the first column, the
conventional designation, “case,” is given (nominative case, genitive case, etc.). In the
second column the function of the declined word is given, followed by an explanation of
the function.
Grammar Review 17
Greek Grammars Functional name2
Nominative Subject (and Predicated Subject)
Genitive Possession / separation
Dative Preposition* / Indirect object
Accusative Limiter** / Direct object
*Other cases may have a preposition too, but it is this case that automatically includes a
preposition in the English translation.
**Limits the extent of the action
t Subject (the person or thing that does the action=John loves Mary)
t Possession / Separation:
Possession: the owner of something=The Word of God God’s Word.
Separation: The man went out of the house.
t Preposition (phrase preceded by: to, at, with, for, by, in, etc.=God’s love is revealed
in his Word)
t Direct object (the word that answers “what?” of the verb= I eat bread. (If a person
is the direct object, the person answers “whom?” of the verb= God loves me.)
Here is an English sentence that includes all of the above cases:
The teacher took her book and handed it to the student.
Let us analyze this sentence.
t Subject (the teacher)
t Possession (the teacher owns the book [“her”])
t Preposition (to the student—indirect object)
t Direct object (book and it—“took” what? book; “handed” what? it)
The following parts of speech are declined: nouns, pronouns, adjectives, and participles.
2. These functional terms are given to assist in learning the conventional terms, the latter retained in this book.
18 LESSON 2
Note: There are three declensions in NT Greek, named First, Second, and Third.
These designations are simply another of way of referring to spelling patterns in the
endings of the declensions. There is no difference in function. A nominative is a
nominative (the subject) in all three declensions, etc.
PART FOUR: Conjugation

The term “conjugation” applies only to verbs. When we conjugate a verb, we give
information about tense, mode, voice, person and number—and in each change we have
a different spelling. Here are basic explanations for these terms:
Tense: In most instances in Greek this refers to time (past, present, future, etc.), but in
Greek the most important part of tense is the kind of action (completed, ongoing, etc.)
rather than the time of the action. More on this below.
Mode: That aspect of Greek that indicates whether the action in the verb is considered
factual, uncertain, or commanded (indicative, subjunctive, and imperative, respectively—
the three terms used to designate these modes).
Voice: A term that indicates whether the subject of the sentence is the doer of the action
(called the active voice); the receiver of the action (called the passive voice), or, does the
action to or for himself/herself (the English reflexive—himself/herself, and called the
middle voice).
Person/Number: The words “I” and “We” refer to the first person, the one(s) doing the
action. The distinction between these two pronouns is “number”—singular or plural.
“You” is the second person, and “he, it, she” (or “they” if plural)—the ones “You and I” are
referring to, are the third person.
PART FIVE: Parse

To “parse” a word means to give all the possible information about a single designated
word. For example: When we parse a noun, we give that noun’s case, number and gender.
When we parse a given verb, we give that verb’s tense, voice, mode, person and number.
In Appendix I, the information required for the various parts of speech is provided. As to
its actual usage, this will become clear once the process begins in the exercises for Lesson 3.
Lesson
Minimum One:
3 The Endings of the First
and Second Declensions
In This Lesson:
► Vocabulary
► Endings of the First and Second Declensions
► Minimum One
► The Definite Article
► Uses of the Pronoun
► Uses of the Adjective
► Exercises
20 LESSON 3
PART ONE: Vocabulary

In all the vocabulary lists, the gender of a noun is indicated by the definite article in front
of the noun. The definite article (“the”) is: ὁ for the masculine, τό for the neuter, and ἡ
for the feminine. For adjectives and pronouns, the masculine form is given in full followed
by the ending of the neuter gender and then the feminine gender.
The English translations reflect the gender distinctions (e.g., for αὔτος, –ό, –ή, the
translations would be: “he, [it], she,” respectively, with the neuter gender placed in brackets
when the translation is to be distinguished-see examples on pages 35, 45 and 46).
Following the definitions, the information in brackets is to assist the learning—it is
information about words derived from the Greek, not the definition. See second and
fourth words below. Any time an English translation is identical to the Greek, it will
appear in bold type, as in the third entry below.
Part A.
ὁ, τό, ἡ the [definite article for the three genders: masculine,
neuter, feminine, respectively]
ἀγαθός, –όν, –ή1 good, useful [girl’s name: Agatha]
ὁ ἄγγελος angel, messenger
ἄλλος, –ό,2 –ή other, another [allocate, allotment, etc.]
ἀμήν amen, verily, truly, so let it be
ὁ ἄνθρωπος person, human being, man, mankind, people,
humankind, [anthropology]3
ὁ ἀπόστολος apostle, envoy, messenger
αὐτός, –[ό], –ή he, [it], she/him, [it], her [automatic]
ἡ βασιλεία kingdom [basilica (in a palace)]
βλέπω I see, look at
δέ but, and
1. When the additional endings are given with the vocabulary in this manner, it should be clear that all three genders are
involved (pronouns and adjectives).
2. The ending for this adjective is an exception to the rule, for it follows the pronouns by dropping the final “ν” in the neuter
gender.
3. Even the “ology” part of this word comes from λόγος—given in the list below. Watch for many words with this ending.
Minimum One 21
ἡ δόξα glory, majesty, fame [doxology]
ἐγώ I [ego]
ἐκεῖνος, –ό, –ή that
ἔχω I have, hold [echo—to hold a sound]
ἡ ζωή life [zoology]
ὁ θέος God, god [theology, theocratic, atheist, etc.]
καί and, even, also, namely
ὁ καιρός time (appointed), season (kind of time=good/bad
times)4
ἡ καρδία heart [cardiology, etc.]
ὁ κόσμος world, universe, [cosmology, cosmetics, etc.]
λέγω I say, speak [cf. λόγος]
ὁ λόγος word, Word, speech, message [all of the –ologies=”study
of…”: geology, theology, psychology, etc.]5
νῦν now
ὁ προφήτης prophet
ἡ φωνή sound, noise, voice, language [All of the “phone”
words: megaphone, telephone, phonetics, etc.]
ὁ χρόνος time [chronology] (in contrast with χαιρός given
above)
Part B.
ἡ ἀγάπη love (this is the love that exists at all times with no
conditions)
ἀλλά but, yet, except
ἡ ἁμαρτία sin [to miss the mark—known and unknown “misses”
as compared to transgressions and trespasses which
are known misses = παράβασις and παράπτωμα
respectively]
4. Dickens’s Tale of Two Cities gives us an excellent example: “It was the best of times; it was the worst of times.” This is in
contrast to chronological time, χρόνος below.
5. Even the first portions of these words are from the Greek language: earth, God, and soul, respectively.
22 LESSON 3
ἀπό gen: (away) from [apostasy—to fall from; apocrypha—

to hide from, etc.]
γάρ for, then (do not confuse with the preposition “for”)
γινώσκω I know (relational knowledge; see οἶδα below for the
difference) [noun: γνῶσις=knowledge, agnostic]
διά gen: through; acc: on account of [dialog=to talk
through…; diagram]
ἐκ, ἐξ6 gen: from, out of [exit]
ἐν dat: in, on, among (translated: with / by about 20
percent of the time)
ἡ ἐξουσία authority, power [versus δύναμις=physical power
(dynamite)]
τό ἔργον work, deed, action [energy]
τό εὐαγγέλιον good news, Gospel [evangelism]
ζητέω I seek, desire, try to obtain
ἡ ἡμέρα day
ἡ θάλασσα sea, lake
κακός, –όν, –ή evil, bad, wrong [cacophony and cacography]
καλέω I call, name, invite
ὁ κύριος Lord, lord, master, sir
λαλέω I speak, say
οἶδα7 I know, understand [intellectual knowing versus
relational knowing as in γινώσκω; compare: German
wissen versus kennen or Spanish saber versus conocer]
ὃτι that, since, because [same form as the neuter indefinite
pronoun—which is rare in the NT]
οὐ, οὐκ, οὐχ no, not [the spelling depends on the first letter of the
following word: consonant, vowel or rough breather,
respectively. The meaning is not changed. These
variations are a part of the indicative mode only
6. ἐξ when following word begins with a vowel or diphthong.
7. This is an old perfect tense that is translated as a present tense..
Minimum One 23
ὁ οὐρανός heaven, sky [Uranos]
οὗτος, τοῦτο, αὓτη singular: this [plural: these] [neuter plural:
ταῦτα=tautology]
σύ you (singular)
ὁ υἱός son
ἡ ὣρα hour, moment
ὥστε therefore, so that
PART TWO: The Endings of the First and Second Declensions

Using ἀγαθός
As noted previously, the designation “Minimum” represents a major element in the
book. The endings of ἀγαθός, used to represent this minimum, in all three genders, must be
mastered!
With good motivation, for these three endings are the endings of the following 43 declensions
in spelling patterns one and two (the “first” and “second” declensions). Keep in mind that
pronouns, adjectives, and participles all have three forms, one for each gender.
t Nouns in all three genders = three declensions
t Pronouns: personal (3); two demonstratives (6); relative (3); and the reflexive (7)
= nineteen declensions
t Adjectives (3) including the definite article (3) in all genders = six declensions
t The middle/passive participle: future middle (3),8 present (3), aorist9 (middle only)
(3), perfect (3) = twelve declensions
t For the feminine gender only, the aorist and perfect participles in active (2) and the
aorist passive participle (1) = three declensions.
The endings of ἀγαθός (“good”) are, therefore, the backbone of a major building block.
Master these three forms and you know the endings of 43 forms!
8. The future passive could be included, but it only occurs in Heb. 3:5, and there it is regular.
9. The term “aorist” is the term used in conventional textbooks for the past tense (indicative mode).
24 LESSON 3
Here is the declension of ἀγαθός (as noted, a declension means each of the four major
cases in both singular and plural).
Masculine Neuter Feminine
SINGULAR
Nom. ἀγαθός ἀγαθόν ἀγαθή
Gen. ἀγαθοῦ ἀγαθοῦ ἀγαθῆς
Dat. ἀγαθῷ ἀγαθῷ ἀγαθῇ
Acc. ἀγαθόν ἀγαθόν ἀγαθήν
PLURAL
Nom. ἀγαθοί ἀγαθά ἀγαθαί
Gen. ἀγαθῶν ἀγαθῶν ἀγαθῶν
Dat. ἀγαθοῖς ἀγαθοῖς ἀγαθαῖς
Acc. ἀγαθούς ἀγαθά ἀγαθάς
We have omitted the Vocative case—the case used for addressing someone (e.g., Ladies and
Gentlemen, I now stand ...). The Vocative case is identical to the Nominative for plural forms and
the same is true for most of the singular forms and is easily recognized from context.
Look again at the three columns above at the genitive plural ending—it is the same for
all three genders. In fact, –ων is the only genitive plural in NT Greek! This is true for all
declensions and parts of speech.
Remember This
–ων is the only genitive plural in NT Greek
Also, look closely at the neuter gender. In the neuter gender, the nominative and
accusative (both singular and plural) are always identical—a phenomenon that occurs
in all neuter gender words, including participles (second and third declensions)!
That is, there are just two endings to learn for the neuter gender, the two nominatives
(singular and plural). This is emphasized in table below.
Minimum One 25
Reason for this, as it is demonstrated in the table below: the nominative is repeated for the
accusative (shown by the curved arrows), and the genitive and datives are the same as the
masculine (shown by the straight arrows).
Remember This
The neuter gender is so similar to the masculine that there are only two
endings to learn: nominative singular and nominative plural.
In all of the 43 forms referred to above, the change occurs after the letters: αγαθ, and it is
the remaining letters, the underlined portions, we refer to as the “Minimum.”
Minimum One
The Endings of the First and Second Declensions
MASCULINE NEUTER FEMININE10

SINGULAR
Nom. –ος –ον –η
Gen. –ου –ης
Dat. –ῳ –ῃ
Acc. –ον –ην
PLURAL
Nom. –οι –α –αι
Gen. –ων –ων
Dat. –οις –αις
Acc. –ους –ας
As noted above, these endings are the endings for all first and second declension nouns,
pronouns, adjectives, and middle/passive participles.11
10. There are four variations of the first declension singular, discussed below in this lesson in which the final letter of the
nominative singular can be a long or short “a”—η or α.
11. As observed earlier, the aorist passive participle is an exception. It is built on the active voice and is discussed in the Lesson
6 on participles.
26 LESSON 3
The following words are examples of this significant relationship. Observe that the endings
given above for ἀγαθός are essentially identical with the endings of the examples below.
Nouns
Masculine λόγος—word
Neuter ἔργον—work
Feminine φωνή—voice
Pronouns [See Appendix D, pages 129-133, for full declensions of all pronouns in all declensions]
MASCULINE: [All these words have the same ending as the masculine ἀγαθός]
αὐτός he (3rd personal pronoun)
οὗτος this (demonstrative pronoun—near)
ἐκεῖνος that (demonstrative pronoun—far)
ὅς who/which (relative pronoun)
NEUTER: [All neuter pronouns have the same ending as the neuter adjective ἀγαθόν
and neuter nouns—minus the final “ν” in the nom. and acc. singular.]
αὐτό it (3rd personal pronoun)
τοῦτο this (demonstrative pronoun—near)
ἐκεῖνο that (demonstrative pronoun—far)
ὅ which (relative pronoun)
FEMININE: [All these words have the same ending as the feminine ἀγαθή]
αὐτή she (3rd personal pronoun)
αὕτη this (demonstrative pronoun—near)
ἐκεῖνη that (demonstrative pronoun—far)
ἥ who/which (relative pronoun)
Adjectives [See Appendix E, pages 134-136, for full declensions of all adjectives in all
declensions]
Masculine: see ἀγαθός
Neuter: see ἀγαθόν
Feminine: see ἀγαθή
PART THREE: The Definite Article “the.”

The endings of ἀγαθός also form the endings of the definite article. Add “rough”
breather to the masculine and feminine nominative endings (singular and plural) and the
letter “t” to all other endings. Look again at the endings of ἀγαθός on page 24, then
note the application of the points just made.
Minimum One 27
This is the definite article (Minimum One—the endings of ἀγαθός in red, and the
changes mentioned above):
MASCULINE NEUTER FEMININE
SINGULAR
Nom. ὁ τό ἡ
Gen. τοῦ τῆς
Dat. τῷ τῄ
Acc. τόν τήν
PLURAL
Nom. οἱ τά αἱ
Gen. τῶν τῶν
Dat. τοῖς ταῖς
Acc. τούς τάς
A Helpful Note About the Endings of the First Declension

In the First Declension, there are three variations in the endings of the singular of
ἀγαθή—long η and short α (no variation in the plural). The first three are feminine, and
the fourth pattern is masculine--something discussed in class by the instructor.
SINGULAR
φωνή12 καρδία γλῶσσα προφήτης
Nom. –η –α -α –ης
Gen. –ης –ας -ης –ου
Dat. –ῃ –ᾳ -ῃ –ῃ
Acc. –ην –αν -αν –ην
PLURAL [The plurals are the same for all four forms]
Nom. –αι
Gen. –ων
Dat. –αις
Acc. –ας
12. It is this pattern that follows the feminine endings of ἀγαθός —the ending chosen for Minimum One because all
pronouns, the neuter middle/passive participle, and over half of the feminine adjectives and nouns are built on this pattern.
28 LESSON 3
For the Curious

(Not Required)
You do not need to understand the content of this box to work with NT Greek, for as pointed out
previously, the form of a word is already done for you!
Regarding καρδία and γλῶσσα (both end with an α): If the vocabulary form of the feminine noun ends
with a variation of the η, an α, there are two possible patterns: one is that the α replaces the η all the way
through the singular, and the second is a combination of the η and α endings for the singular. The rule
given here for the two possibilities explains the reason for the variation.
Pattern one (καρδία): If the final α has what I call a “rye” letter (ρ ι ε) letter in front of the α, the α is
retained throughout the singular=καρδία. Pattern two (γλῶσσα): If the final α does not have a “rye”
letter (ρ ι ε) letter in front of the α, an η is used in the genitive and dative singular (the letters used in
these cases in ἀγαθή).
What is written here about the formation of first declension nouns also applies to the formation of first declension
adjectives. To illustrate: the stem for μικρός is μικρ. Because the stem ends with one of the “rye” letters
(ρ), the feminine form will have an alpha in all the singular endings just like the noun καρδία. The
plural forms are all the same.
PART FOUR: Helpful Notes on the Personal Pronoun:

Because beginning students want the first rule or definition given to remain unchangeable,
these points are simply mentioned to alert you to other options. There are times when the
third personal pronoun (αὐτός—“he”) is used as an adjective or to show emphasis.
t When there is no definite article in front of the pronoun, the purpose is to show
emphasis. For example, ὁ ἄνθρωπος αὐτός = “the man himself.”
t However, if an article precedes the pronoun, ὁ ἄνθρωπος ὁ αὐτός, the pronoun
is translated “same” making the translation: “the same man.”
Do not be concerned at this point about these distinctions.
Other personal pronouns are often included even though the pronoun is found within
the verb itself. In such cases, the addition of the personal pronoun is used for emphasis
since the subject is already found in the verb. For example: ἐγώ λέγω = I myself am
speaking.
Minimum One 29
PART FIVE: The Use of the Adjective
The Translation of Adjectives: Attributive or Predicative

Note the differences in the following two English sentences:
t The good man is going to church.
t The man is good.
In the first example we have the attributive use of the adjective “good”—“good” is
being attributed.
In the second statement we have the predicative use—we are predicating the
statement that the man is good.
Fundamental rule: the attributive function always has the definite article preceding the
adjective (whether there is or is not a definite article in front of the noun being modified is
irrelevant). When the adjective does not have a definite article in front of it, it is probably
the predicate function, but could also be attributive.13
Examples of the attributive function. Observe that the word order does not make any
difference, nor does the article or absence of the article with the noun make any difference.
What is true of all the examples: The adjective always has the definite article in front of
it. Each example is translated: “The good man.”
t ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος
t ἄνθρωπος ὁ ἀγαθός
t ὁ ἄνθρωπος ὁ ἀγαθός
Examples of the predicate function. Observe the absence of the article with the adjective:
These examples could be translated: “The / a man is good.”
t ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος
t ἄνθρωπος ἀγαθός
In some instances the above examples of the predicate function could also be attributive.
Context eliminates the ambiguity of the so–called “predicate” position.
13. When this occurs, the translator will immediately recognize the construction.
30 LESSON 3
Remember...
t The third personal pronoun: αὐτός, αὐτό, αὐτή [he, it, she]: the word declines
just like ἀγαθός –όν –ή except the “ν” drops off in the neuter nom. and acc.
t This dropping of the “ν” occurs in all neuter gender pronouns. The third personal
pronoun as well as the relative pronoun, the demonstrative pronoun, etc. Some
adjectives are also affected, e.g., the definite article and ἄλλος, referred to earlier.
t Neuter nouns and adjectives follow the neuter form of the adjective ἀγαθόν, the
form found in Minimum One.
PART SIX: Exercises
Instruction for All Exercises in the Book

To benefit from the exercises to the fullest extent, you need to be able to parse
each word in every passage as well as give a smooth English translation. This
assures you that you are not just memorizing either the key to the translation in
Appendix B or the translation of an English Bible.
Part One
Proper nouns are not given in vocabulary lists but they do show up in the exercises. These
proper nouns will not create any difficulty if they are pronounced out loud—the recognition
is usually immediate.
1. τοῖς ἀγγέλοις τῷ κόσμῳ
2. οἱ ἄνθρωποι τῆς Γαλιλαίας
3. ὁ ἀγαθὸς λόγος
4. βλέπω τοὺς ἀποστόλους τοὺς ἀγαθούς-- λέγουσιν (they are speaking)

τῇ ἀγαθῂ φωνῇ
5. ἡ δόξα τοῦ θεοῦ
6. ἄλλος προφήτης τῆς δόξης

Minimum One 31
7. ἔχω τοὺς λόγους τῆς ζωῆς τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τοῦ κόσμου
8. ἐγὼ βλέπω τὸν Χριστὸν τῆς δόξης
9. καὶ νὺν ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ ἐγένετο (has come) τῷ κόσμῳ, ἀμήν
10. αὐτὸ ἀγαθόν
11. ἐγώ λέγω τῷ Πέτρῳ
12. οἱ προφῆται τοῦ θεοῦ λέγουσιν ([they] are speaking) τοὺς λόγους τῆς
καρδίας τῇ ἀγαθῂ φωνῇ τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τοῦ κόσμου
13. ἀγαθὸς αὐτὸς ὁ ἄγγελος, ἀγαθοὶ αὐτοὶ οἱ ἄγγελοι
14. ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄγγελος αὐτός
15. ὁ ἀπόστολος ὁ ἀγαθὸς λέγει ([he] is speaking) τῷ καιρῷ τῷ ἀγαθῷ
16. οἱ ἀγαθοὶ προφῆται λέγουσιν ([they] are speaking) τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τοῖς
κακοῖς.
Part Two
1. τοῖς ἔργοις τῶν ἀνθρώπων
2. οὗτοι οἱ ἀγαθοὶ προφήται τῆς βασιλείας
3. τῷ λόγῳ τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ οὐκ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ τοῦ ἄλλου ἀγγέλου
4. νῦν λέγω τοὺς λόγους τῆς ζωῆς τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς προφῆταις ἐν τῷ

κόσμῳ
5. ἔχω τὸ εὐαγγέλιον αὐτοῖς
6. ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ θεοῦ
7. ἡ ἐξουσία τοῦ κυρίου

32 LESSON 3
8. ἐγὼ βλέπω τὸν Χριστὸν τῷ οὐρανῷ καὶ τῷ κόσμῳ.
9. τοῦτο ἔργον ἀγαθόν
10. ἡ ἁμαρτία οὐκ ἔστιν (it is) ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ
11. οὐ γὰρ λέγω τοὺς λόγους τῆς ἁμαρτίας. νῦν βλέπω τὸν θεόν
12. ὁ θεὸς ἀγάπη
13. Ἰησοῦς κύριος καὶ Χριστός
14. ἡ βασιλεία τῆς δόξης καὶ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ
Did You Know….

That there are over 5,700 handwritten Greek manuscripts
containing all or portions of the New Testament? The great majority
of these manuscripts were copied between the ninth and fifteenth
centuries. The oldest one of any size dates to around AD 200.
Some handwritten copies were done after the Gutenberg press was
invented in 1456.
Lesson
Minimum Two
4 Endings of the
Third Declension
In This Lesson:
► Introduction to the Third Declension
► Vocabulary
► The Verb “to be”
► Minimum Two: Endings of the Third
Declension
► Application Examples
► Exercises
34 LESSON 4
PART ONE: Introduction to the Third Declension

In this lesson we take up the final declension, called the “Third” declension to distinguish
it from the “First and Second” declensions that we learned for “Minimum One.”
t As noted in Lesson 3, the designations first, second, third are merely terms to
account for the various patterns of spelling, not function.
t A nominative in the first declension is precisely the same nominative in the second
or third declensions—it simply has a different pattern for spelling. The same is
true for all of the other cases (genitive, dative, and accusative).
t This is evident when the patterns of spelling are observed in the endings of
ἀγαθός.
The key to working with this declension:
t Master the endings
t Learn the genitive singular—the form given in parentheses.
t The stem of third–declension words is found in the genitive singular (minus the
genitive ending). This will become clear in the discussion below.
PART TWO: Vocabulary
Part A. (see Appendix K for meaning of sub-headings)

περί gen: concerning, about acc: around
[periscope, perimeter]
Neuter –ματ nouns
τό αἷμα, (αἵματος) blood [hemoglobin]
τό θέλημα, (θελήματος) will, desire
τό ὄνομα, (ὀνόματος) name [onomatopoeia (“buzz,” “spit”
etc.)—from name and make = a word that
makes the sound of its meaning]
τό πνεῦμα, (πνεύματος) spirit, Spirit, wind, breath [pneumonia]
τό ῥῆμα, (ῥήματος) word, saying [rhetoric]
Minimum Two 35
τό στόμα, (στόματος) mouth [stomach]
τό σῶμα, (σώματος) body [psychosomatic]
Dentals (τ δ θ) [+ σ = σ]
ἡ ἐλπίς, (ἐλπίδος) hope, expectation
ἡ νύξ, (νυκτός) night
πᾶς, (παντός), πᾶν, πᾶσα1 all, each, every [Pan American]
ὁ πούς, (ποδός) foot [podiatry]
τό ὕδωρ, (ὕδατος) water [hydro…]
τό φῶς, (φωτός) light [phosphorous]
ἡ χάρις, (χάριτος) grace, favor, kindness [Eucharist]
Iota stems
ἡ δύναμις, (δυνάμεως) power, miracle [dynamite]
ἡ πίστις, (πίστεως) faithfulness, faith, trust, belief
ἡ πόλις, (πόλεως) city [police, politics, metropolitan,
cosmopolitan, etc.
Part B. (see Appendix K for meaning of sub-headings)

ἐστίν 2 he, it, she is
Liquids (λ μ ν ρ)
ὁ αἰών, (αἰῶνος) age, eternity [aeon / eon]
ὁ ἀνήρ, (ἀνδρός) man, male, husband [ανδρο + γυνη =
androgynous (both male and female)
τό πῦρ, (πυρός) fire [pyromaniac]
τίς, [τί]3 (τίνος), who? which? [what? why?]
τις, [τι]4 (τινος) someone, anyone, [something, anything]
1. The feminine form is declined like the first declension word γλῶσσα.
2. The last letter “ν” of this word is not found 100 percent of the time and is, therefore, called the “movable nu.” The
manuscripts are very inconsistent with its usage. Some scribes attempted to “atticize” the Koine and would therefore include or
exclude the “ν” under rules that are inconsistently applied. See Appendix F for the full conjugation of the verb “to be” in all the
tenses.
3. The interrogative pronoun never loses the accent (and it always has an accent on the first syllable.
4. The indefinite pronoun may or may not have an accent.
36 LESSON 4
ἡ χείρ, (χειρός) hand, arm, finger [chiropractor] —

practor (from πρᾶξις = an act or deed)
Palatals (γ κ χ) [+ σ = ξ]
ἡ γυνή, (γυναικός) woman, wife [androgynous]
ἡ σάρξ, (σαρκός) flesh, body
Miscellaneous
ὁ ἀρχιερεύς, (ἀρχιερέως) chief priest, high priest
ὁ βασιλεύς, (βασιλέως) king
ὁ γραμματεύς, (γραμματέως) scribe [grammar]
τό ἔθνος, (ἔθνους) nation [ethnic]
ἡ μητήρ (μητρός) mother
τό ὄρος, (ὄρους) mountain, hill
ὁ πατήρ, (πατρός) father
PART THREE: The Verb “to be”

PRESENT TENSE
εἰμί I am ἐσμέν we are
εἶ you are ἐστέ you are
ἐστίν he, it, she is εἰσίν they are
It is important to know that the so–called verb “to be” is equivalent to an equals sign. That
is, the nominative case is always required on both sides of the verb. Example: The man is
the king is the same as the king is the man. Both “man” and “king” must be nominative: ὁ
ἄνθρωπος ἐστίν ὁ βασιλεύς.
PART FOUR: Endings of the Third Declension

Only two forms exist for the third declension since the masculine and feminine forms of
this declension are identical. The neuter is very similar. When you have learned the two
declensions of the Third Declension noun, you will have also learned the endings for the
following 18 forms:
t All third declension nouns (two declensions)—“Minimum Two” itself.
Minimum Two 37
t All third declension masculine and neuter adjectives. (Some adjectives like πας
follow the first declension endings for the feminine) = two declensions
t All third declension pronouns. This includes the interrogative and indefinite
pronouns = four declensions.
t Participles in the active voice for all tenses (future, present, aorist and perfect) for
the masculine and neuter genders = eight declensions.
t The aorist passive participle in the masculine and neuter genders = two declensions.
The feminine gender follows the first declension—Minimum One.
At this stage of your study, do not be concerned about the meaning of such words as
“participle,” and the tense designations. Merely observe how many forms are based on this
Minimum.
As noted above on the entry for “participles,” these endings are the same endings used for
Minimum Six, the endings of the participle of εἰμί—so master them now and you will
have helped yourself in two ways: first, you will be able to work with a very common NT
declension and, second, you will have Minimum Six-A essentially learned. Here are the
endings (observe, as noted above, the masculine and feminine endings are identical):
Minimum Two
Endings of the Third Declension
MASCULINE/FEMININE NEUTER
SINGULAR
Nom. –ς or –none –none
Gen. –ος
Dat. –ι
Acc. –α or ν
PLURAL
Nom. –ες –α
Gen. –ων
Dat. –σι
Acc. –ας
38 LESSON 4
Remember This
Just as you learned for the first and second declension neuter words, you only have
two endings to learn for the neuter gender: the two nominatives (singular and
plural)—this is true for all neuter gender words in the New Testament.
PART FIVE: Application of The Endings to ἐλπίς and ὄνομα

t The stem of a third declension noun occurs in all of the forms except the nominative
singular.
t For this reason, we learn the genitive singular of a third declension word because
the stem of the words in the third declension are known by the genitive singular
form with the genitive ending (–ος) removed.
t There are many rules that explain why the nominative singular does not have the
entire stem, but learning them is unnecessary simply because those changes have
already been done for us in the NT and we do not want to argue with the writer! For
those who still feel the need to understand the aberrations of the nominative case
formations, see the box below labeled “For the Curious,” page 79 on participles.
t We give two examples to demonstrate why the stem of the genitive is crucial to
understanding the third declension.
Example One: ἐλπίς, (ἐλπίδος)—hope
We give first the stem (the word minus the (–ος) of the genitive singular):
SINGULAR
Nom. ελπιδ
Gen. ελπιδ
Dat. ελπιδ
Acc. ελπιδ
PLURAL
Nom. ελπιδ
Gen. ελπιδ
Dat. ελπιδ
Acc. ελπιδ
Minimum Two 39
Now we add the third declension endings. The word is feminine.
SINGULAR
Nom. ελπιδ ς = ελπις
Gen. ελπιδ ος
Dat. ελπιδ ι
Acc. ελπιδ α
PLURAL
Nom. ελπιδ ες
Gen. ελπιδ ων
Dat. ελπιδ σι = ελπισι
Acc. ελπιδ ας
In both of the words in the third column (following the equal sign), the nominative singular
and the dative plural, the “δ” and the “σ” combine to make just a “σ”—as a sounding of
the two letters would show.
Example two: ὄνομα,–(ὀνόματος)—name
We give first the stem (the word minus the –ος of the genitive singular):
SINGULAR
Nom. ονοματ
Gen. ονοματ
Dat. ονοματ
Acc. ονοματ
PLURAL
Nom. ονοματ
Gen. ονοματ
Dat. ονοματ
Acc. ονοματ
Now we add the third declension endings. The word is neuter (and thus the things
we have learned about the neuter need to be applied—nominatives and accusatives are
identical, and the genitives and datives follow the masculine).
40 LESSON 4
SINGULAR
Nom. ονοματ -none = ονομα
Gen. ονοματ -ος
Dat. ονοματ -ι
Acc. ονοματ -none = ονομα
PLURAL
Nom. ονοματ -α
Gen. ονοματ -ων
Dat. ονοματ -σι = ονομασι
Acc. ονοματ -α
The three words in the third column above (following the equal sign) are the actual words
found in the NT. Why? The Greek word cannot end with a “τ” (the nom. and acc.
singulars), and the letter “σ” and “τ” combine (the dative plural). Again, these rules do
not need to be learned and are given solely to show that there was a rationale in the Greek
mind for these changes.
Remember...
t As noted earlier, the neuter gender declension is very simple. Because the neuter
gender is so similar to the masculine and feminine patterns, only the nominative
singular and plural endings need to be learned.
t As pointed out for the second declension, in the neuter gender, the nominatives
and accusatives are identical.5 And also as in the second declension, the neuter
genitives and datives are the same as the masculine (and this includes the feminine
for the third declension) form.
t Notice again that the genitive plurals are alike and also the same as in the first and
second declensions (-ων).
t Notice also that the dative singular ending has an iota as in the other declensions,
only in this declension the “iota” is not subscripted [ῳ and ῃ as in the first and
second declensions—Minimum One].
t Do not confuse the neuter plural “α” with the first declension nominative singular:
5. The neuter gender does not occur in the first declension.

Minimum Two 41
καρδία. A very natural and frequent error is made when students see the “α“
ending. This “α“ ending occurs for the first declension nominative singular and
also for the neuter nominative and accusative plurals.
t A critically important guideline when working with the third declension is to look
for the definite article in front of the word. Since the definite article is the same for
all three declensions and never changes its spelling even when the following word does,
this stability can often clarify the case, number and gender for this declension that
varies so much in its spellings. For example: τό ἔθνος, (τοῦ ἔθνους).
Important point: Knowing Minimums One and Two, with Minimum Four applied
(which consists of six tense identifiers), means you are equipped to decline almost every noun,
pronoun, adjective and participle in the New Testament. That is, all declensions are covered.
t Only verbs (and participles which are built on verbs) and vocabulary are left to be
able to work with the Greek New Testament text!
t Verbs are covered in the next Minimum, and utilize the same Minimum Four
just mentioned above! Participles are covered in Minimum Six and are built on
Minimums Two and Four. This is the “building block” plan at work.
PART SIX: Exercises
Part One
Note: When you find two forms of a verb side by side, the first entry is the form found
in the NT and is the result of contraction. The vocabulary form (in parentheses) does
not appear in the NT but needs to be learned this way to account for other formations.
Contract verbs are covered in Lesson 6.
1. τοῖς υἱοῖς τῶν πάντων ἀνθρώπων
2. ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ ἡ πίστις τοῦ Χριστοῦ καὶ τὸ θέλημα τοῦ
πνεύματος
3. τῷ ὕδατι τῆς ζωῆς, περὶ τῆς δυνάμεως τοῦ θεοῦ
4. Ἰησοῦς ἐστιν τὸ φῶς τοῦ κόσμου

42 LESSON 4
5. ἡ χάρις τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐκ τῆς πίστεως αὐτοῦ
6. ζητῶ (ζητέω) τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ὥστε ἡ ἀγάπη αὐτοῦ λαλῇ ([it]
may speak) μοι [to me]
7. οὗτος ἐστιν ὁ ἄνθρωπος τῆς πίστεως
8. οἱ λόγοι ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ
9. ἡ ἐλπὶς αὐτοῦ ἐστί ἐν τῷ ὕδατι καὶ ἐν τῷ αἵματι ἀλλὰ οὐκ ἐν τῷ κακῷ

πνεύματι
10. ἡ χάρις τοῦ θεοῦ ἐστίν παντί
11. ἐγὼ λέγω πάντα τὰ ῥήματα τῆς χάριτος καὶ τῆς πίστεως τοῖς
ἀνθρώποις
12. ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ καὶ ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ, Ἰησοῦς ἐστιν κύριος
13. ἐκ τῆς νυκτὸς καὶ διὰ τῆς ἡμέρας, ἔχω τὴν βασιλείαν τῆς ἐλπίδος
14. οἶδα τὸ θέλημα τοῦ θεοῦ καί λαλῶ (λαλέω) αὐτῷ ἡμέραν καὶ νύκτα
Part Two
1. τίς ἐστιν οὕτος ὁ ἄνθρωπος; (The question mark in Greek looks like our semi–colon).
2. ἐν τῷ σώματι, ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ περὶ τῆς σαρκός
3. τῷ πατρὶ καὶ πᾶσι τοῖς υἱοις καὶ τῷ ἀγαθῷ ἔργῳ
4. ὁ βασιλεὺς ὁ κακός ἐστιν ἐν τῇ πόλεί τῇ κακῇ ἀλλὰ οὐκ ἐν τῇ πόλει

τοῦ φωτός
5. σὺ εἶ [are] ὁ υἱός τινος, ἀλλὰ οὐκ ἐγώ οἶδα τὸ ὄνομά σου.

Minimum Two 43
6. ὁ κακὸς τούτου τοῦ αἰωνός ἐστιν τῆς σαρκὸς καὶ οὐ τοῦ πνεύματος
7. ὁ ἀνήρ ἐστιν ἐκ γυναικός ἀλλὰ ἡ γυνή ἐστιν καὶ ἐκ τοῦ ἀνδρός.
8. αὕτη ἐστὶν Μαρία, ἡ μητήρ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ.
9. καὶ δὲ ὁ καιρὸς τοῦ ἔθνους ἐστιν ὁ καιρός τῆς ἐλπίδος.
10. ὃτι ἡ ὥρα ἐγένετο [has come], ζητῶ (ζητέω) τῆν χεῖρα τοῦ κυρίου
11. πίστευε [believe] ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ νῦν, καὶ σὺ σωθησῃ, (you
shall be saved).
12. ἐν τῷ αἵματι καὶ ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ, ἐγὼ καλῶ (καλέω) τῇ

δυνάμει τοῦ θεοῦ.
13. Ἰησοῦς λούει (is washing) τοὺς πόδας τοῦ Ἰούδα.
14. οἱ γραμματεῖς καὶ οἱ Φαρισαίοι καὶ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς λέγουσιν (are saying)

ὅτι ὁ Ἰησοῦ οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ κύριος.
15. τὰ ὄρη τοῦ θεοῦ.
Part Three
1. βλέπω τὴν δόξαν τῶν ἀγγέλων τοῦ θεοῦ, καὶ νῦν ἔχω τὴν ἐλπίδα τὴν
ἀγαθὴν τῆς ζωῆς.
2. λέγω ἄλλῳ ἀνθρώπῳ περί τούτου τοῦ λόγου καὶ οὐ περὶ ἐκείνου
λὀγου.
3. ζητῶ (ζητέω) τὴν χάριτα τοῦ κυρίου. ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ

βασιλεύς.
4. Οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ καιρός τοῦ προφήτου καὶ τοῦ ἀποστόλου;

Lesson
Minimum Three
5 The Four Basic
Verb Forms
In This Lesson:
► Vocabulary
► The Verb
► Tense in the Indicative Mode
► Minimum Three: The Four Basic Verb Forms
► The Aorist Tense
► The Infinitive
► Exercises
Minimum Three 45
Part A.
ἀγαπητός, –όν, –ή1 beloved
ἅγιος, –ον, –α holy [hagiographa=holy writings]
αἰώνιος, –ον, –α eternal [cf. aeons]
ἀκούω I hear [acoustics]
ἡ ἀλήθεια truth
ἀλλήλων of one another [note the ending—this is the genitive
plural ending for all declensions and all genders]
ἡ γραφή scripture, Scripture, writing [graphics; monograph]
γράφω I write
δίκαιος, –ον, –α just, righteous
εἷς, ἕν, μία one [these three words are found below: οὐδείς, etc.]
ἡμεῖς we (first personal pronoun pl.)2
ἦν he, it, she was (imperfect of verb “to be”)3
μένω I remain
οὐδείς, [οὐδέν], οὐδεμία no one, none, [nothing] [“ουδ” in front of the Greek
word for “one”]
περιπατέω I walk, conduct myself [Peripatetics]
πιστός, –όν, –ή faithful, believing
πληρόω I fulfill [pleroma=fullness, eternal reality]
ποιέω I do, make
πρῶτος, –ον, –η Adv. first, before; Ordinal: first
ὑμεῖς you (second personal pronoun pl.)4
1. Remember that these hyphenated endings stand for the other two genders.
2. The genitive, dative and accusative: ἡμῶν ἡμῖν ἡμᾶς [See Appendix D.]
3. Instead of “he, it, she IS”—which is the present tense of the verb “to be.” See Appendix F for the full conjugation of the
verb “to be” in the present, imperfect and future tenses.
4. The genitive, dative and accusative: ὑμῶν ὑμῖν ὑμᾶς [see Appendix D; the second person plural, “you,” is easy to
remember and distinguish from the first person plural: the Greek begins with the English letter “u”].
46 LESSON 5
Part B.
ἡ ἀρχή beginning, ruler [Archaic, archaeology]
ἐμός, ἐμόν, ἐμή my, mine
ἡ ἐντολή commandment
ἕως gen: till, until, as far as
ἤδη now, already
ἳνα in order that, that (mostly used with the subj. mode)
καθώς as, even as
μαρτυρέω I witness, testify [martyr]
νεκρός, –όν, –ά dead, dead body, corpse [necrology=list of the dead]
ὅστις, [ὅτι]*, ἥτις whoever [whatever] [from ὅς and τίς]
οὕτως thus, so
ὁ ὀφθαλμός eye [ophthalmology]
πονηρός, –όν, –ά evil, bad

πρός gen. to the advantage of; dat. near, at, by; acc. toward,
with [proselyte (προς + ηλθον
τό τέκνον child
τηρέω I keep, guard, observe
ἡ χαρά joy
*Identical to the conjunction, but this form of the pronoun does not occur in the NT.
PART TWO: The Verb

Verbs are the words that tell us what is happening in the sentence (see Lesson 2). What we
have studied to this point has been about nouns, pronouns and adjectives—words that are
declined according to their function, but do not deal with the action.
“What is happening,” the verb, is expressed in many ways. For examples, the verb tells
us whether the subject is doing the action or the action is being done to the subject, and
whether or not the action is considered factual or merely possible, or whether the action is
being commanded, plus other information.
Minimum Three 47
These aspects of the verb are indicated with the following terms: tense, voice, mode,
person, and number.
t Tense is concerned in Greek primarily with the nature of the action (is the action
ongoing, or completed) and, in the indicative mode, gives us the time of the action,
past, present, future, for example. The following tenses are covered: present, future,
imperfect, aorist and perfect.
t Voice is concerned with whether the subject of the sentence is doing the action
(active voice) or being acted upon (passive). The Greek has a third voice called the
middle voice. It is similar to the use of the reflexive pronoun in English: She does
it to / for herself. See Lesson 2 on English grammar.
t Examples of the active and passive voices: (notice that in the following two
sentences the ball is both subject and object).
t John throws the ball. Subject: John; object: ball = active voice. John does the
action = active voice.
t The ball is thrown by John. Subject: ball. In this case, though, the ball is the
recipient of the action done by John = passive voice.
t Example of the middle voice: Joan bathes herself. Subject: Joan. Joan does the
act to herself.
t Mode is concerned with the manner in which the action of the verb is stated, such
as: is the act factual, possible, or commanded? There are three main modes in
Greek: Indicative, Subjunctive, and Imperative.5 And while we are concerned at
this stage of our study with the Indicative Mode, for the purpose of understanding
the distinctions among these modes we mention here briefly the differences of all
three.
t Indicative: This mode is straightforward. A verb in the indicative mode is
“indicating” that what is being said is reality (whether or not it is). That is, the
sentence: “It is snowing” indicates a reality, and is therefore in the indicative
mode. It may not be snowing, but that is irrelevant, for the mode indicates
that it is.
t Subjunctive: This mode is the mode of uncertainty. A verb in the subjunctive
5. There is a fourth mode in the NT, the optative. It occurs only 68 times and is discussed briefly in Lesson 10.
48 LESSON 5
mode is saying that a certain action may occur. “It may snow.”
t Imperative: Just as the English definition indicates, this is the mode of
command: do this, do that: etc. Covered in Lesson 8.
t Person: there are three “persons” in all languages, so this term refers to the
distinctions between me, you, and him/her (and the plural forms of each). Notice
in the following example the use of all three persons:
I am talking to you about him. I, you, him (first, second and third persons). That
is, when we use “I” we mean “first person.” “I” am talking to “you,” the “second
person,” about “him,” the third person.
t Number: this simply means that the number of “persons” is singular or plural.
PART THREE: Tense in the Indicative Mode

Our concern at this point in our study is the Indicative Mode, by far the most used mode
in the New Testament. There are over 15,000 verbs in the NT in the indicative mode,
whereas there are less than 2,000 forms in the subjunctive mode, and less than 2,000 in
the imperative mode. See Appendix G (page 152).
It is in the indicative mode where time is concerned (past, present and future). The diagram
given here depicts the time elements as related to NOW, this very moment. See below and
Appendix F for the English translations.
Graphic Portrayal of “tense” in the Indicative Mode
NOW
Past Time Present & Future Time
Secondary Endings Primary Endings
ε augment for “earlier”
Imperfect Present
Aorist Future
Perfect (Perfect)
Pluperfect
Minimum Three 49
t The line under the tense named indicates ongoing action, in progress.
t The circle for the aorist tense represents a completed action in its simplest form,
called “point” action—our simple past tense.
t The circle with the perfect tense accompanied by a line represents both a completed
action and the results of that action continuing into the present (which is why
“perfect” is on both sides of the vertical line).
t Note: There are 86 verbs in the NT we call the Pluperfect tense and it is similar
to the perfect tense, the difference being that the line representing ongoing action
ends before the “NOW” line. See Appendix F for its form.
The above graphic showing where the tenses relate to “now” prepares us for the next
Minimum.
Did You Know ...

That none of the original manuscripts is in existence, and that no
two manuscripts agree 100 percent of the time? It is the work of
textual critics to carefully study the large number of manuscripts
with the objective of determining as far as possible what variation
among the readings is the original, or closest to the original.
PART FOUR: The Four Basic Verb Forms

In the following table, columns one and two are the endings for imperfect and 2 aorist
tenses—they are on the left–side of “NOW” in the above graphic. Columns three and four
are the endings for the present tense—they are on the right–side of “NOW” in the above
graph. The explanation for these tenses is given below.
These four sets of endings must be mastered. They are the foundation of all other verb
forms in the indicative mode.6
6. This is true for the “–ω” conjugation, which makes up the great majority of the NT verbs. Another category is covered in
Lesson 9, the “–μι” verb. Do not concern yourself with this latter form. All in due course.
50 LESSON 5
Minimum Three
The Four Basic Verb Forms
The Time Factor:

NOW
On this side: “earlier” than NOW On this side: either Present or Future
Secondary = All Past Tenses Primary = All Non–past Tenses
(+ ε augment)
IMPERFECT Tense Endings PRESENT Tense Endings
Active Voice Middle/Passive Active Voice Middle/Passive
Num. Per Voices Voices
1 –ον –ομην –ω –ομαι
SG 2 –ες –ου –εις –ῃ (σαι)
3 –ε(ν) –ετο –ει –εται
1 –ομεν –ομεθα –ομεν –ομεθα
PL 2 –ετε –εσθε –ετε –εσθε
3 –ον –οντο –ουσι(ν) –ονται
The meanings of the terms Primary and Secondary:

t Primary means that the time element is either present or future.
t Secondary means that the time element is some point in the past and thus beyond
any change. Because this term represents a time in the past, its verb form always
includes an “ε” augment, and in Greek, this means at the beginning of the word.
The meaning of the “ε” augment:
t The “ε” augment is easily remembered by associating it with “e” for earlier, earlier
than NOW, earlier than the present or future.
t Thus: the present and future tenses are primary and do not have the augment.
All other Greek tenses in the indicative mode have an augment: imperfect, aorist,
perfect, and pluperfect.7
7. As noted above, the pluperfect is not a form to be learned in this textbook since it occurs just 86 times in the New
Testament. See Appendix F, pp. 149-150.
ε before α becomes η,
ε before ε becomes η (except in the verb ἔχω),
ι, ο, υ are lengthened into ῑ, ω, ῡ.
A diphthong lengthens its first vowel:

Minimum Three 51
αι becomes ῃ, ει becomes ῃ,
οι becomes ῳ, and ευ becomes ηυ.
t This “ε” may appear as an “η” or an “ει” when the verb begins with a vowel. For
example, the verb “ἀκούω” begins with a vowel. When the “ε” augment is
attached to this verb in a past tense it becomes an “η” (ε + α = η). These changes
are not anything to worry about since such changes have already been done!
t The imperfect tense endings are also the endings for the 2 aorist, discussed below.
The following table of basic English translations for the verb λύω is given here to assist you
in seeing the distinctions. (See Appendix F for complete conjugations and translations.)
Indicative Mode Translations

Present Active λύω I loose / I am loosing
Middle λύομαι I loose (for) myself
Passive λύομαι I am being loosed
Imperfect Active ἔλυον I was loosing
Middle ἐλυόμην I was loosing (for) myself
Passive ἐλυόμην I was being loosed
Future Active λύσω I will loose
Middle λύσομαι I will loose (for) myself
Passive λυθήσομαι I shall be loosed
Aorist Active ἔλυσα I loosed
Middle ἐλυσάμην I loosed (for) myself
Passive ἐλύθην I was loosed
Perfect Active λέλυκα I have loosed
Middle λέλυμαι I have loosed (for) myself
Passive λέλυμαι I have been loosed
PART FIVE: The Aorist Tense:

The term “aorist” in the indicative mode means the simple past. This tense is divided
into the 1 aorist and the 2 aorist—designations which apply only to the variations or
irregularities in spelling, not to function. The numbers in front of the word “aorist” merely
represent “regular” and “irregular.” The 1 aorist is regular in its form. The 2 aorist is
irregular in its form.
52 LESSON 5
Just as in all languages, Greek has regular and irregular verbs. What does this mean?
Easy: regular verbs do not change their spelling when appearing in another tense, whereas
irregular verbs do.
Examples in English:
Regular Irregular
Look (present) Go (present)
Looked (past) Went (past)
It is evident that in the word “Look” there is no change in the root word when we move
from the present tense to the past tense, whereas for the word “Go,” it completely changes,
and this is what we mean by irregular. And it is the 2 aorist that is irregular.
The 2 Aorist: (the irregular form of the simple past)

This is a copycat tense, for it copies the present tense in its endings in all formations
(participles, infinitives, subjunctive and imperative modes) except in the indicative mode.
Interestingly, though, it is still a “copycat” tense even in the indicative mode, for in this
mode the 2 aorist copies the endings of the imperfect. We demonstrate the “copycat”
features of the present tense in Lesson 8 (see page 98).
In Greek there are three tenses that have irregular verb forms: future, perfect and aorist (our
past tense) and we call these irregular forms: 2 future, 2 perfect and 2 aorist, respectively.
The most common irregular verbs occur in the aorist (our past) tense, and it is only this
tense we learn.8
Although we have a section on the so–called 2 aorist, we mention it here because in the
four basic forms above, the 2 aorist has the secondary endings of the imperfect tense.
Remember This
The 2 aorist is a “copycat” tense because it copies the same endings as the present
tense everywhere except in the indicative mode. But even in the indicative mode, it
still is a “copycat” tense, for in the indicative mode, the 2 aorist copies the imperfect
tense endings.
8. 2 futures and 2 perfects are rare compared to the 2 aorist.

Minimum Three 53
Telling the difference. If the endings are the same, how does one distinguish between the
tenses? The 2 aorist, as an irregular verb, changes its stem, as we pointed out above with
the English examples.
Since we are dealing thus far only with the indicative mode, the 2 aorist copies the imperfect
tense and the imperfect is always regular; the 2 aorist is always irregular.
PART SIX: The Infinitive

An infinitive is a verb that completes the verbal idea in the preceding verb and shows up
in English with the word “to” in front of the verb: I am able to walk. “To walk” is the
infinitive and completes the verb “I am able ...” It does not have all of the usual properties
of a verb. For example, “person” and “number” are not a part of an infinitive.
t Present active ends with: –ειν (λύ ειν) “to loose” (and, as noted in the box above, it
is also the ending of the 2 aorist active infinitive, and the distinctions are discussed
under Minimum Seven).
t Present middle/passive ends with: –εσθαι (λύ εσθαι) “to loose oneself ” / “to be
loosed”
t Infinitives in the other tenses are given in Lesson 8 (page 96).
PART SEVEN: Exercises
Part One
1. τίς ἀκούει τοῦτον τὸν ἄνθρωπον; (semi-colon is the Greek question mark)
2. βλέπομεν αὐτὸν ἐν τῷ σώματι
3. οἱ προφῆται ἔβλεπον αὐτὸν ἐν τῷ σώματι
4. οἱ ἄγγελοι λέγουσι τῷ πατρὶ καὶ ἔλεγον πᾶσι τοῖς τέκνοις
5. ὁ βασιλεύς ὁ κακὸς ἔμενεν ἐν τῇ πόλει τῇ κακῇ καὶ οὐ γινώσκει τὴν

πόλιν τοῦ φωτός
54 LESSON 5
6. ἡμεῖς ἐγινώσκομεν τον πατέρα.
7. ἐγὼ ἔλεγον περὶ τοῦ κακοῦ κόσμου καὶ οὐ περὶ τοῦ κόσμου τοῦ
πνεύματος
8. ἐβλεπόμεθα
9. ἐγινώσκετε τοὺς υἱοὺς πάντων τῶν ἀνθρώπων
10. ἐγινώσκεσθε ἀπ̉ ἀρχῆς. ὁ λόγος ἀκούεται ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ
11. οἱ λόγοι ἀκούονται ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ
12. οἱ λόγοι ἔμενον ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ τοῦ προφήτου
13. ἡμεῖς οἴδαμεν τὸν θεὸν καὶ ὁ θεὸς γινώσκει τοὺς υἱοὺς τῶν
ἀνθρώπων
14. ἡ χάρις τοῦ χριστοῦ λέγεται τῇ θαλάσσῃ
15. ἀπ̉ ἐλπίδος καὶ ἐν τῇ ἐλπίδι μένομεν παρὰ (with) τῷ θεῷ
16. ἐν τῇ ὣρᾳ τῆς χάριτος, ἡ δύναμις τοῦ θεοῦ γινώσκεται
17. περιπατῶ (περιπατέω) ἐν τῇ ἀλήθεια ἱνα βλέπω τὸν θεόν
18. ὅτι ὁ θεός ἐστίν πιστὸς ὣστε, ἐστίν καὶ ἀγάπη καί οὐκ ἔστιν κακὸς ἐκ
στόματος αὐτοῦ
Part Two (from the NT)

Some grammatical forms and vocabulary helps are provided to accommodate the stage of learning..
1 John 1:1 Ὃ ἦν ἀπ᾿ ἀρχῆς, ὃ ἀκηκόαμεν [ἠκούομεν], ὃ ἑωράκαμεν [ἐβλέπομεν]

τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν, ὃ ἐθεασάμεθα [we beheld] καὶ αἱ χεῖρες ἡμῶν
ἐψηλάφησαν [touched] περὶ τοῦ λόγου τῆς ζωῆς 2 καὶ ἡ ζωὴ ἐφανερώθη [was
Minimum Three 55
manifested] καὶ ἑωράκαμεν [ἐβλέπομεν] καὶ μαρτυροῦμεν καὶ ἀπαγγέλλομεν [to
declare] ὑμῖν τὴν ζωὴν τὴν αἰώνιον ἥτις ἦν πρὸς τὸν πατέρα καὶ ἐφανερώθη
[was manifested] ἡμῖν 3 ὃ ἑωράκαμεν [ἐβλέπομεν] καὶ ἀκηκόαμεν [ἠκούομεν] καὶ

ἀπαγγέλλομεν [to declare] καὶ ὑμῖν, ἵνα καὶ ὑμεῖς κοινωνίαν [fellowship] ἔχητε
[ἔχετε] μεθ᾿ [with] ἡμῶν. καὶ ἡ κοινωνία [fellowship] δὲ ἡ ἡμετέρα [our] μετὰ
[with] τοῦ πατρὸς καὶ μετὰ [with] τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ. 4 καὶ ταῦτα
γράφομεν ἡμεῖς, ἵνα ἡ χαρὰ ἡμῶν ᾖ [ἐστίν] πεπληρωμένη [fulfilled]. 5 Καὶ
ἔστιν αὕτη ἡ ἀγγελία ἣν ἀκηκόαμεν [ἠκούομεν] ἀπ᾿ αὐτοῦ καὶ ἀναγγέλλομεν
[to declare] ὑμῖν, ὅτι ὁ θεὸς φῶς ἐστιν καὶ σκοτία [darkness] ἐν αὐτῷ οὐκ ἔστιν
οὐδεμία. 6 Ἐὰν [if ] εἴπωμεν [λέγομεν] ὅτι κοινωνίαν [fellowship] ἔχομεν
μετ᾿ [with] αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐν τῷ σκότει περιπατῶμεν, ψευδόμεθα [to lie] καὶ οὐ
ποιοῦμεν τὴν ἀλήθειαν· 7 ἐὰν [if] δὲ ἐν τῷ φωτὶ περιπατῶμεν ὡς αὐτός
ἐστιν ἐν τῷ φωτί, κοινωνίαν [fellowship] ἔχομεν μετ᾿ ἀλλήλων καὶ τὸ αἷμα
Ἰησοῦ τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ καθαρίζει [to cleanse] ἡμᾶς ἀπὸ πάσης ἁμαρτίας. 8
ἐὰν [if] εἴπωμεν [λέγομεν] ὅτι ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ ἔχομεν, ἑαυτοὺς πλανῶμεν [to
deceive] καὶ ἡ ἀλήθεια οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἡμῖν. 9 ἐὰν [if] ὁμολογῶμεν [to confess]
τὰς ἁμαρτίας ἡμῶν, πιστός ἐστιν καὶ δίκαιος, ἵνα ἀφῇ [to forgive] ἡμῖν τὰς
ἁμαρτίας καὶ καθαρίσῃ [to cleanse] ἡμᾶς ἀπὸ πάσης ἀδικίας [unrighteousness].
10 ἐὰν [if] εἴπωμεν [λέγομεν] ὅτι οὐχ ἡμαρτήκαμεν [have sinned] , ψεύστην
[liar]ποιοῦμεν αὐτὸν καὶ ὁ λόγος αὐτοῦ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἡμῖν.
Lesson Minimums Four
and Five
6 The Tense Identifiers and
Their Application
In This Lesson:
► Vocabulary
► Minimum Four: The Tense Identifiers
► Minimum Five: Applying the Tense Identifier
► Table: Indicative Mode
► Contract Verbs
► Exercises
Minimums Four and Five 57
Part A.
ἀγαπάω I love [compare φιλέω=I love; see next bracketed
note]
ὁ ἀδελφός brother [φίλος=love Philadelphia]
γεννάω I bear, beget, produce [generation, genealogical, etc.;
compare μονογενης only begotten]
ἡ δικαιοσύνη righteousness, justice
εἰ if
ἡ ἐκκλησία a church, (the) Church, assembly, congregation [εκ +
καλέω=to call out; clergy, ecclesiastical]
ἔσχατος, –ον, –η last [eschatology]
Deponent Verbs (see note following the vocabulary part C)
ἀποκρίνομαι I answer
ἀσπάζομαι I greet
γίνομαι I become, be (εἰμί [verb “to be”] rule applies)
δέχομαι I receive
δύναμαι I am powerful, am able [dynamite]
ἔρχομαι I come, go [put the prepositions (απο, εις, εκ, and
προς) in front of this verb for the following results:
ἀπέρχομαι I go away
εἰσέρχομαι I go into, enter
ἐξέρχομαι I go out
προσέρχομαι I go toward
κάθημαι I sit down
πορεύομαι I go, come
προσεύχομαι I pray
φοβέομαι I fear, am afraid
Not Part of the Basic 300 (but helpful)

ἀρνέομαι I deny
διέρχομαι I go through
58 LESSON 6
ἐκπορεύομαι I go out, come out

ἐπαγγέλλομαι I promise
θεάομαι I behold
ψεύδομαι I lie, deceive
Part B.
βάλλω I throw, cast [ballistics]
ὁ διδάσκαλος teacher
διδάσκω I teach [didactic]
εἰμί I am (the verb “to be”— ἐστίν and ἦν already
learned)
ἐκβάλλω I throw out, cast out, remove
ἐπαγγελία promise
ἐπερωτάω I ask, entreat
ἐρωτάω I ask
ἰδού See! Behold!
καλός, όν, –ή beautiful, good
λαμβάνω I take, receive [a common synonym for this word is:
παραλαμβάνω]
μόνος, –ον, –η only, alone [monograph (graph from γραφη;
monogamous; monopoly; ]
ὅλος, –ον, –η whole [holocaust (ὁλος + καυσις [burning] =
annihilation)]
ὅπου adv. of place: where; whereas, since.
ὁράω I see (synonym for βλέπω in that both words convey
sense perception, whereas ὁράω includes mental
sight).
οὐδέ and not, not even, neither, nor [combination of ου and
δε].
οὖν therefore, then, accordingly
τό παιδίον little child [pediatrics]
πάλιν again [palimpsest]
παρακαλέω I request, entreat [A combination of “beside” and
“call”—hence the παρακλητος=Paraclete.]1
τυφλός, –όν ,–ή blind
ὧδε here
Part C. Prepositions
ἔξω gen: outside; adverb: without (used only with the
genitive)
εἰς acc: into, in, among (used only with the accusative)
ἐπί, ἐπ᾿, ἐφ᾿ gen: on, over, when [ἐπί + δερμα (skin) =
epidermis]; dat: on the basis of, at [ἐπί + τομ (to
cut) =epitome=to cut short = summary; compare
“tome”]; acc: on, to, against
ἐνώπιον gen: before
κατά gen: down from, against [catastrophic; all of the
“cata” words like catacomb, cataclysm, catalogue];
acc: according to, throughout, during
μετά gen: with; acc: after [metaphysics]
παρά gen: from; dat: beside, with, in the presence of; acc:
alongside of [parable, from πάρα and βάλλω–to
throw alongside for purposes of comparison; all our
“para” words like parallel, paralegal, paragraph, etc.]
σύν dat: with [the “sym” in sympathy and the“syn” in
synonym; even the rest of these words are Greek:
πάθος and ὄνομα]
ὑπέρ gen: in/on behalf of; acc: above [hyperbole=from
ὑπέρ and βάλλω (all of our “hyper” words, including
“hype.”)]
ὑπό gen: by; acc: under [all of our “hypo” words, such as
hypodermic, hypochondria, etc.]
1. The paraclete is a term applied to the Holy Spirit. In this respect English translations determine from context how to
translate. The sinner needs an advocate (1 Jn 2:1); the sufferer needs a comforter (Jn 14:16, 26, etc.) and in both cases the Greek
word is literally: One called to the side for purposes of helping.
60 LESSON 6
Deponent Verbs
“Deponent” refers to all words that end with –μαι in the vocabulary lists, the Primary
Middle/Passive ending. Since all other verbs end with –ω, the Primary Active ending, how
is it that some verbs end with the middle/passive form instead of the conventional Primary
Active ending of –ω?
At one time the so–called “deponent” verbs did have the “active” form. For some verbs,
though, the “active” form was no longer used at the time the NT was written because the
“middle” form itself adequately represented the “active.”
Remember This
“Deponent” is a term that tells us a lot of information
with one word: a verb that only occurs in the NT in the
middle/passive form, but has an active translation.
PART TWO: The Tense Identifiers

Tense identifiers are the letters in a word that distinguish all tenses not covered in the basic
four, learned in Minimum Three: the present and imperfect tenses—active and middle/
passive for both tenses.
[Remember, from Lesson 5, the 2 aorist copies the present tense everywhere except in the
indicative when even then it still copies, but in the indicative it copies the imperfect.]
The explanation and demonstration for using these Tense Identifiers follow.
Minimum Four
Tense Identifiers
—σ Future (active and middle)

—θησ Future (passive)
—σα (σ)* 1 Aorist (active and middle)
—θη (θε) (θ)** 1 Aorist (passive)
—κα (κ)*** Perfect (active)
—(none) Perfect (middle/passive)
*The —σα shortens to —σ in the subjunctive.
**The –θη shortens to –θε in the masculine and neuter participle (-θει for the feminine participle),
and to just –θ in the subjunctive mode. Covered in Minimums Six and Seven, respectively.
*** The –κα shortens to –κ in the active voice of the participle, and shows up as –κυι in the active
voice participle of the feminine gender. The key for the perfect active is the –κ.
Importance of the Tense Identifiers

t This Minimum is one of the most important given in the book, for guesswork
is eliminated when it comes to figuring out where a given form fits into a large
number of verb and participle tables.
t The significance of these six markers is that they make it possible to immediately
know the tense of practically all verbs and participles in the Greek New Testament
(participles are covered in Minimum Six-A and B).
t The concept of the “building block method” will increasingly be evident in the
lessons ahead.
62 LESSON 6
Did You Know ...

That in the early Christian centuries, as Christianity spread across
the civilized Western world, the New Testament was translated into
numerous other languages? The language most used was Latin.
Others included: Syriac, Armenian, Coptic, Georgian, and Ethiopic.
PART THREE: Application of the Tense Identifiers
The Eight Derived Verb Forms

We now come to our next Minimum and, as noted, it is built on Minimums Three and
Four. Until you have mastered Minimums Three and Four, proceeding to Minimum Five
will be unproductive.
A review of Minimum Three would be very worthwhile, given in Lesson 5.
Minimum Five is simply the application of Minimum Four to Minimum Three.
t The Future tense, as a Primary tense, simply inserts the tense identifiers (either a
–σ or a –θησ) in front of the connecting vowel (ε or ο).
t In all other tenses, as Secondary tenses, the tense identifier replaces the first vowel
(the connecting vowel) of the endings in Minimum Three; resulting forms with
some tips are given below.
MINIMUM FIVE can be stated in two sentences: (see page 48 as a point of reference)
INSERT the tense identifier in front of the primary tense endings (Minimum Three).
REPLACE the connecting vowel of the secondary tense endings (ε or ο, from Minimum
Three) with the tense identifier.
Minimum Five
Formation of Remaining Tenses in Indicative Mode
The Time Factor:

NOW
(+ ε augment)
With IMPERFECT Tense Endings With PRESENT Tense Endings
Voices Voices
Aorist active: replace Aorist middle: Future active: insert Future middle: insert
connecting vowel* replace connecting σ before connecting σ before connecting
with: σα vowel with: σα vowel vowel
Aor. passive:**replace Future passive:

connecting vowel with: insert θησ before
θη connecting vowel
Perf. active: replace Perf. middle/passive:
connecting vowel with: delete connecting
κα vowel
*The connecting vowel is either the ο or the ε—the first vowel of the ending.
**The aorist passive is built on the active form and for this reason is in the far left column. This
is true in every form of the aorist passive: all modes, the infinitive and the participle, as will
become evident in subsequent lessons.
We now demonstrate the results of this Minimum applied, using the verb λύω.
PART FOUR: The Indicative Mode in All Tenses:

This is what the form looks like in the New Testament, with tense identifiers in red. At the
top of each tense and voice are the instructions from Minimum Five.
64 LESSON 6
Secondary = All Past Tenses Primary = All Non–past

(+ ε augment) Tenses
Voices Voices
Aorist active: replace Aorist middle: replace Future active: Future middle: place
connecting vowel connecting vowel place σ before σ before connecting
with: σα with: σα connecting vowel vowel
1 ἔλυσα* ἐλυσάμην λύσω λύσομαι
SG 2 ἔλυσας ἐλύσω λύσεις λύσῃ
3 ἔλυσε(ν)** ἐλύσατο λύσει λύσεται
1 ἐλύσαμεν ἐλυσάμεθα λύσομεν λυσόμεθα
PL 2 ἐλύσατε ἐλύσασθε λύσετε λύσεσθε
3 ἔλυσαν ἐλύσαντο λύσουσι(ν) λύσονται
Aor. passive: replace Future passive:
connecting vowel place θησ before
with: θη connecting vowel
1 ἐλύθην λυθήσομαι
SG 2 ἐλύθης λυθήσῃ
3 ἐλύθη λυθήσεται
1 ἐλύθημεν λυθησόμεθα
PL 2 ἐλύθητε λυθήσεσθε
3 ἐλύθησαν λυθήσονται
Perf. active: replace Perf. m/p: remove
connecting vowel connecting vowel
with: κα
1 λέλυκα* λέλυ_μαι
SG 2 λέλυκας λέλυ_σαι
3 λέλυκε(ν)** λέλυ_ται
1 λελύκαμεν λελύ_μεθα
PL 2 λελύκατε λέλυ_σθε
3 λέλυκαν —ασι λέλυ_νται
* The “ν” found in the model of Minimum Three (–ον) drops off, leaving just tense identifier.
**The expected α in the tense identifier for the aorist (σα) and for the perfect (κα)
combines with the ε of the model followed in Minimum Three.
Some Observations About the Table (above) See Appendix F for
these forms with their translations.
t For the primary tenses (the present and the future tenses), the connecting vowel is
not affected. As indicated, the future tense forms simply add (insert) an σ in front
of the endings for the future active and middle, and θησ for the future passive.
t Again, for the secondary tenses, (the tenses that need an ε for “earlier”) the tense
identifier substitutes (replaces) the connecting vowel.
t In the case of the perfect middle/passive this substitution amounts to the actual
dropping of the connecting vowel.
Note: While the perfect active is built on the secondary model, the perfect middle/
passive is built on the primary model. This is a phenomenon that may reflect the fact
that the perfect tense embodies both the primary and secondary features. See the
graph on page 48 where the line for the perfect tense is on both sides of “NOW.”
PART FIVE: Contract Verbs
Definition of a Contract Verb

Contract verbs are verbs whose stems end with a vowel: either α, ε, or ο.
t In vocabulary lists, these verbs will look like: ἀγαπάω, λαλέω, πληρόω. (The
reason the vocabulary form is given even though it does not actually occur in the
New Testament is because it is necessary to know what happens with the verb in
all other formations).
t The easiest way to know if a verb is a contract verb is to remove the final ω from
the vocabulary form of the verb (the ω stands for “I”), and if there is an α, ε or ο
at the end, it is a contract verb. Notice this in the three verbs given here.
Contraction in Present and Imperfect Tenses

t Contraction takes place only in the present and imperfect tenses (the “Four Basics”
and therefore only in the present participle, since there is no imperfect participle—
participles are introduced in Lesson 7).
66 LESSON 6
t The reason for this is that in all of the “eight derived forms” the “tense identifiers”
separate the final vowel of a contract vowel from the “connecting vowel” (or
diphthong) which means there are no vowels next to each other to contract. See
demonstration below.
t The “tense identifier” also causes the contract vowel (α ε ο) to lengthen. Thus, α
and ε lengthen to η, and ο lengthens ω.
t Examples: the future of ἀγαπάω goes through the following development:
ἀγαπάσω αγαπήσω. The verb πληρόω goes through the following
development in the future tense: πληρόσω πληρώσω.
Remember This
Contraction occurs in the present and imperfect tenses only
because in all other tenses the tense identifer goes between the
vowel in the stem and the vowel of the ending=no vowels to
contract.
In the following illustrations of what actually happens, the uncontracted form is given, and
then the form that shows the contraction, which is the form that actually occurs in the New
Testament. Also, observe that all contractions result in a circumflex accent—invaluable in
recognizing a contraction.2
Examples
t The contractions with α: Note that α with any vowel (or diphthong) that contains
an ο or an ω, results in an ω. In all other cases, the result is an α or an ᾳ.
UNCONTRACTED CONTRACTED (NT)
α+η=α αγαπαητε ἀγαπᾶτε
α+ῃ=ᾳ αγαπαῃς ἀγαπᾷς
α+ε=α αγαπαετε ἀγαπᾶτε
α + ει = ᾳ αγαπαει ἀγαπᾷ
α+ο=ω αγαπαομεν ἀγαπῶμεν
α + ου = ω αγαπαουσι ἀγαπῶσι
α+ω=ω αγαπαω ἀγαπῶ
2. In the combinations of letters that are joined to the vowel of the contract verb, I have used a modified English vowel order
to help recall the scheme: a e i o u, in Greek: η ῃ ε ει ο ου ω.
t The contractions with ε: Note that vowels or diphthongs connecting to the ε
dominate the resulting contraction.
UNCONTRACTED CONTRACTED
ε+η=η λαλεητε λαλῆτε
ε+ῃ=ῃ λαλεῃ λαλῇ
ε + ε = ει λαλεετε λαλεῖτε
ε + ει = ει λαλεει λαλεῖ
ε + ο = ου λαλεομεν λαλοῦμεν
ε + ου = ου λαλεουσι λαλοῦσι
ε+ω=ω λαλεω λαλῶ
t The contractions with ο: Note that the ο in the verb stem dominates the resulting
contraction.
UNCONTRACTED CONTRACTED
ο+η=ω πληροητε πληρῶτε
ο + ῃ = οι πληροῃ πληροῖ
ο + ε = ου πληροετε πληροῦτε
ο + ει = οι πληροει πληροῖ
ο + ο = ου πληροομεν πληροῦμεν
ο + ου = ου πληροουσι πληροῦσι
ο+ω=ω πληροω πληρῶ
PART SIX: Exercises3

Note: As indicated in Lesson 3, the Vocative case was omitted in the “Four Cases” scheme.
The Vocative case is identical to the Nominative for plural forms and the same is true for
most of the singular forms. It is the case used for addressing someone (e.g., Ladies and
Gentlemen, I now stand ...), and is found in many places in 1 John, including the first
word of 1: John 2:1.
1 John 2:1 Τεκνία [remember τέκνον] μου, ταῦτα γράφω ὑμῖν ἵνα μὴ [not] ἁμάρτητε
[related to ἁμαρτία]. καὶ ἐάν [εἰ] τις ἁμάρτῃ [related to ἁμαρτία], παράκλητον
3. Some words in the original are given in brackets in a different grammatical form that corresponds with the stage of learning.
68 LESSON 6
[advocate/helper] ἔχομεν πρὸς τὸν πατέρα, Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν δίκαιον· 2 καὶ

αὐτὸς ἱλασμός [atonement/mercy seat] ἐστιν περὶ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν, οὐ περὶ
τῶν ἡμετέρων [ours] δὲ μόνον ἀλλὰ καὶ περὶ ὅλου τοῦ κόσμου. 3 Καὶ ἐν τούτῳ
γινώσκομεν ὅτι ἐγνώκαμεν αὐτόν, ἐὰν [εἰ] τὰς ἐντολὰς αὐτοῦ τηρῶμεν. 4
ὁ λέγων [λέγει] ὅτι ἔγνωκα αὐτόν καὶ τὰς ἐντολὰς αὐτοῦ μὴ τηρῶν [τηρει],
ψεύστης [liar] ἐστίν, καὶ ἐν τούτῳ ἡ ἀλήθεια οὐκ ἔστιν· 5 ὃς δ᾿ ἂν τηρῇ [τηρει]
αὐτοῦ τὸν λόγον, ἀληθῶς [adverb related to αληθεια] ἐν τούτῳ ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ
θεοῦ τετελείωται [has been perfected], ἐν τούτῳ γινώσκομεν ὅτι ἐν αὐτῷ ἐσμεν
[related to ἐστίν—note 1 per. pl.]. 6 ὁ λέγων [λέγει] ἐν αὐτῷ μένειν ὀφείλει [ought
to/should] καθὼς ἐκεῖνος περιεπάτησεν καὶ αὐτὸς [οὕτως] περιπατεῖν. 7
Ἀγαπητοί, οὐκ ἐντολὴν καινὴν [new] γράφω ὑμῖν ἀλλ᾿ ἐντολὴν παλαιὰν
[old] ἣν εἴχετε ἀπ᾿ ἀρχῆς· ἡ ἐντολὴ ἡ παλαιά ἐστιν ὁ λόγος ὃν ἠκούσατε.
8 πάλιν ἐντολὴν καινὴν γράφω ὑμῖν, ὅ ἐστιν ἀληθὲς ἐν αὐτῷ καὶ ἐν ὑμῖν,
ὅτι ἡ σκοτία [darkness] παράγεται [add παρά and ἄγω] καὶ τὸ φῶς τὸ ἀληθινὸν
[adjective] ἤδη φαίνει [shines]. 9 Ὁ λέγων [λέγει] ἐν τῷ φωτὶ εἶναι [infinitive of verb
“to be”] καὶ τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ μισῶν [μισει —he hates] ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ ἐστὶν ἕως
ἄρτι [now]. 10 ὁ ἀγαπῶν [ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἀγαπαει] τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ ἐν τῷ φωτὶ
μένει καὶ σκάνδαλον [sound out] ἐν αὐτῷ οὐκ ἔστιν· 11 ὁ δὲ μισῶν [ὁ ἄνθρωπος
δὲ μισει] τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ ἐστὶν καὶ ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ περιπατεῖ
καὶ οὐκ οἶδεν ποῦ ὑπάγει [ὑπο and αγω], ὅτι ἡ σκοτία ἐτύφλωσεν [related to
τυφλος] τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτοῦ. 12 Γράφω ὑμῖν, τεκνία, ὅτι ἀφέωνται [are
forgiven] ὑμῖν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι διὰ τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ. 13 γράφω ὑμῖν, πατέρες, ὅτι
ἐγνώκατε τὸν ἀπ᾿ ἀρχῆς. γράφω ὑμῖν, νεανίσκοι [young men], ὅτι νενικήκατε
[have overcome] τὸν πονηρόν. 14 ἔγραψα ὑμῖν, παιδία [related to παιδιον], ὅτι
ἐγνώκατε τὸν πατέρα. ἔγραψα ὑμῖν, πατέρες, ὅτι ἐγνώκατε τὸν ἀπ᾿ ἀρχῆς.
ἔγραψα ὑμῖν, νεανίσκοι, ὅτι ἰσχυροί [strong] ἐστε [related to ἐστίν—2 pers. pl.] καὶ
ὁ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ ἐν ὑμῖν μένει καὶ νενικήκατε [to overcome] τὸν πονηρόν.
15 Μὴ [not] ἀγαπᾶτε τὸν κόσμον μηδὲ τὰ ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ. ἐάν [εἰ] τις ἀγαπᾷ
τὸν κόσμον, οὐκ ἔστιν ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ πατρὸς ἐν αὐτῷ· 16 ὅτι πᾶν τὸ ἐν τῷ
κόσμῳ, ἡ ἐπιθυμία [desire/lust] τῆς σαρκὸς καὶ ἡ ἐπιθυμία τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν
καὶ ἡ ἀλαζονεία [pride] τοῦ βίου [life], οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ τοῦ πατρὸς ἀλλ᾿ ἐκ τοῦ
κόσμου ἐστίν. 17 καὶ ὁ κόσμος παράγεται καὶ ἡ ἐπιθυμία [desire/lust] αὐτοῦ,
ὁ δὲ ποιῶν [ὁ ἄνθρωπος δὲ ποιεῖ] τὸ θέλημα τοῦ θεοῦ μένει εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα. 18
Παιδία, ἐσχάτη ὥρα ἐστίν, καὶ καθὼς ἠκούσατε ὅτι ἀντίχριστος [sound out]
γεγόνασιν [have come], καὶ νῦν ἀντίχριστοι [sound out] πολλοὶ γεγόνασιν [have
come], ὅθεν [from which] γινώσκομεν ὅτι ἐσχάτη ὥρα ἐστίν. 19 ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐξῆλθαν
ἀλλ᾿ οὐκ ἦσαν [related to ἦν] ἐξ ἡμῶν· εἰ γὰρ ἐξ ἡμῶν ἦσαν, μεμενήκεισαν ἂν
μεθ᾿ ἡμῶν· ἀλλ᾿ ἵνα φανερωθῶσιν [may be manifested] ὅτι οὐκ εἰσὶν [related to
ἐστίν] πάντες ἐξ ἡμῶν. 20 καὶ ὑμεῖς χρῖσμα [anointing] ἔχετε ἀπὸ τοῦ ἁγίου
καὶ οἴδατε πάντες. 21 οὐκ ἔγραψα ὑμῖν ὅτι οὐκ οἴδατε τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἀλλ᾿
ὅτι οἴδατε αὐτήν καὶ ὅτι πᾶν ψεῦδος [sound out] ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας οὐκ ἔστιν.
22 Τίς ἐστιν ὁ ψεύστης εἰ μὴ ὁ ἀρνούμενος [one who denies] ὅτι Ἰησοῦς οὐκ
ἔστιν ὁ Χριστός; οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ ἀντίχριστος, ὁ ἀρνούμενος τὸν πατέρα καὶ
τὸν υἱόν. 23 πᾶς ὁ ἀρνούμενος τὸν υἱὸν οὐδὲ τὸν πατέρα ἔχει, ὁ ὁμολογῶν
[one who confesses] τὸν υἱὸν καὶ τὸν πατέρα ἔχει. 24 ὑμεῖς ὃ ἠκούσατε ἀπ᾿
ἀρχῆς, ἐν ὑμῖν μενέτω [let it remain]. ἐὰν [εἰ] ἐν ὑμῖν μείνῃ [μενει] ὃ ἀπ᾿ ἀρχῆς
ἠκούσατε, καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν τῷ υἱῷ καὶ ἐν τῷ πατρὶ μενεῖτε. [μενετε]. 25 καὶ
αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ ἐπαγγελία ἣν αὐτὸς ἐπηγγείλατο [he promised] ἡμῖν, τὴν ζωὴν
τὴν αἰώνιον. 26 Ταῦτα ἔγραψα ὑμῖν περὶ τῶν πλανώντων [the ones deceiving]
ὑμᾶς. 27 καὶ ὑμεῖς τὸ χρῖσμα ὃ ἐλάβετε [λαμβάνετε] ἀπ᾿ αὐτοῦ, μένει ἐν ὑμῖν
καὶ οὐ χρείαν [need] ἔχετε ἵνα τις διδάσκῃ [διδάσκει] ὑμᾶς, ἀλλ᾿ ὡς τὸ αὐτοῦ
χρῖσμα διδάσκει ὑμᾶς περὶ πάντων καὶ ἀληθές ἐστιν καὶ οὐκ ἔστιν ψεῦδος,
70 LESSON 6
καὶ καθὼς ἐδίδαξεν ὑμᾶς, μένετε ἐν αὐτῷ. 28 Καὶ νῦν, τεκνία, μένετε ἐν
αὐτῷ, ἵνα ἐὰν [εἰ] φανερωθῇ [it might be manifested] σχῶμεν [ἔχομεν] παρρησίαν
[confidence] καὶ μὴ [not] αἰσχυνθῶμεν [be ashamed] ἀπ᾿ αὐτοῦ ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ
[sound out] αὐτοῦ. 29 ἐὰν [εἰ] εἰδῆτε [οιδατε] ὅτι δίκαιός ἐστιν, γινώσκετε ὅτι
καὶ πᾶς ὁ ποιῶν [ὁ ἄνθρωπος ποιει] τὴν δικαιοσύνην ἐξ αὐτοῦ γεγέννηται [has
been born].
Did You Know ...

That the first major translation of the Bible into English was done
by Wycliffe in 1384? That English translation, which resulted in a
spiritual revival, was not from the Greek but from the Latin Vulgate.
Lesson
7 Minimum Six
The Participle
In This Lesson:
► Vocabulary
► Introduction to the Participle
► Minimum Six-A: The Active Voice Participle
► Minimum Six-B: The Middle/Passive Voice
Participle
► Exercises
72 LESSON 7
Part A.
Second Aorist Verbs (the present tense is given in parentheses)
ἐγένετο (γίνομαι) (3rd pers. singular)=It happened / It came
to pass. Notice stem change=2 aorist and therefore
needs the secondary middle/passive ending—the
copycat of the imperfect in the indicative mode.)
εἶδον (ὁράω) I saw
εἶπον (εἶπαν) (λέγω) I said
ἔφαγον (ἐσθίω) I ate
ἤλθον (ἔρχομαι) I came, went [2 aorist is not a deponent]
Not Part of the Basic 300 (but very important)

ἀνέβην (ἀναβαίνω) I ascended, went up [μετέβην
κατέβην]
ἀπέθανον (ἀποθνῄσκω) I died
ἔβαλον (βάλλω) I threw)
ἔλαβον (λαμβάνω) I took, received
ἔλιπον (λείπω) I left
ἔπαθον (πάσχω) I suffered
εὗρον (εὑρίσκω) I found
ἤγαγον (ἄγω) I went, led, brought
ἥμαρτον (ἁμαρτάνω) I sinned
Regular Vocabulary
ἀναβαίνω I go up, ascend [see 2 aorist above]
δώδεκα, –όν, –ή twelve [2 + 10]
ἐσθίω I eat
καταβαίνω I go down [see 2 aorist above]
Minimum Six 73
Part B.
ἀπόλλυμι I destroy, loose; mid. = die [Appolyon=Destroyer]
ἀπολύω I release, send away, dismiss
ἀποστέλλω I send away (a liquid verb) [ἄπο +στέλλω]
βαπτίζω I baptize
ἡ γῆ earth (geology)
δεῖ It is necessary (from δέω=I bind)
ἐαυτοῦ, –ης singular: of himself/herself/itself
ἡ εἰρήνη peace [Irene]
ἐκεῖ there (compare εκεῖνος)
ἤ or, than
καγώ and I, but I [και and εγω]1
κρίνω I judge
ὁ μαθητής, –οῦ disciple [μαθάνω = I learn]
μάλλον rather
μέγας, μέγα, μεγάλη large, great [megabucks, megapolis, etc.]
μέν on the one hand, indeed
ὅσος, –ον, –η as great as, as many as
πιστεύω I trust, believe (πιστις)
πολύς, πολύ, πολλή singular: much plural: many [polygamy (πολυς
γαμος=marriage] adverb: often
πῶς how?
τό σημεῖον sign, miracle [very important theological word in
Gospel of John]
σώζω I save (spiritually heal)
χαίρω I rejoice
Part C.
ἄγω I go, lead, bring
1. The combination of two words is called “crasis.”
74 LESSON 7
αἰτέω I ask, demand

ἀκολουθέω I follow
ἀνοίγω I open
ἀποθνήσκω I die
ἀποκτείνω I kill, slay
ἡ γλῶσσα tongue, language [glossalalia]
τό δαιμόνιον demon
δέξιος, –ον, –α right
διό therefore
ἐυθύς immediately
θέλω I will, wish
θεωρέω I behold
συνάγω I gather [σύν + ἄγω; see next word]
ἡ συναγωγή synagogue
Part D.
δοκέω I think, suppose [δοκεῖ= it seems]
ὁ δοῦλος servant, slave
ἑπτά seven [heptagon]
ἐρῶ I will say
ὁ θάνατος death [Thanatopsis (θανατος + οψις=view)]
ὁ θρόνος throne
κηρύσσω I preach, proclaim [kerygma]
κράζω I cry out
ὁ λίθος stone [lithography]
μέσος, –ον, –η midst [μέσος + ποταμος (river) = Mesopotamia; cf.
hippopotamus=river horse]
ἡ οἰκία house
ὁ οἶκος house
ὅπως that, in order that; adv. how, in what way
Minimum Six 75
ὁ ὄχλος crowd
ἡ παραβολή parable [παρά + βάλλω; to cast alongside (to
compare with ...)]
πέμπω I send
πίπτω I fall
τότε then
PART TWO: Introduction to the Participle

Participles are very common in the New Testament, and it is impossible to work with NT
Greek without knowing how to recognize and translate the participle.
What is a “participle”? A participle is a verbal adjective. That is, it is part verb and part
adjective. What does this mean? Both words in this definition are important (“verbal”
and “adjective”).
t First, then, all participles are built on verbs (not nouns, or pronouns, not
adjectives or adverbs)
t This means that any verb can become a participle.
t Second, as an adjective, however, the verbal idea is used to do what adjectives do:
modify or clarify a noun.
t This means that the participle will have the same properties of an adjective, namely,
case, number and gender.
t Note the development of this characteristic:
In the following English sentences, the verb “sing” becomes a participle by becoming
an adjective. Make sure you see the distinctions.
Verb: The man is singing.
Participle: The singing man has a good voice.
Example one: SINGing is a verb.
Example two: SINGing is an adjective.
76 LESSON 7
The Participle of εἰμί

The Participle of εἰμί should be understood in the following way: since the verb εἰμί
means “I am” or “I be” or “I exist,” the participle means “being.”
In the following English sentences, the verb “I am” becomes a participle by becoming an
adjective. Make sure you recognize the distinctions.
t Verb: “I am a teacher.”
t Participle: The “being” man (The man who is) is my friend.
Example one: “am” is a verb (“I exist as a teacher”).
Example two: “am” = “being” is used as an adjective.
How does the “participle of εἰμί help me work with the New Testament Greek?
t It helps simply because the application of the “Tense Identifiers” to the “participle
of εἰμί” makes it possible to recognize all participles in the active voice as well as
the passive voice of the aorist.
t We give below in Minimum Six–A the “participle of εἰμί.
Minimum Six has two parts. Part A covers the active voice participle and Part B covers the
middle/passive voice participle.
PART THREE: The Active Voice Participle

The active voice participle. Remember, the aorist passive follows the active voice model,
always, including the participle.
The masculine and neuter gender participles are built on the endings of the third declension,
and the feminine is built on the endings of the first declension.
Here, it would be very helpful to review the endings of the third declension, Minimum
Two, for these endings are used for the masculine and neuter forms. The endings of the
first declension, Minimum One, which the feminine uses, should also be reviewed.
Forming the participle is very simple. First, add –οντ to the endings of the third
declension (Minimum Two) for the masculine and neuter and –ουσ to the endings of the
first declension (Minimum One—γλωσσα model, page 27). The following forms result:
[for the curious who want to know about the unpredictable formation of the nominative
singular, see the box on page 79].
Minimum Six 77
Minimum Six–A
The Participle
P of εἰμί

SINGULAR
ὤν2 ὄν οὔσα
ὄντος οὔσης
ὄντι οὔσῃ
ὄντα οὖσαν
PLURAL
ὄντες ὄντα οὖσαι
ὄντων οὐσῶν
οὖσι οὔσαις
ὄντας οὔσας
The participle of εἰμί, the above forms, can stand alone. That is, they do not need to have
a verb stem attached to them to have meaning or function. More below.
Important points:
Just as with the third declension (and these participles are using the third declension
endings), the stem of a word is known by looking at the genitive, minus the genitive
ending (–ος).
It is easy to confuse the -ων of the masculine nominative singular with the –ων of the
genitive plural. The best way to tell the difference is to remember the genitive has -οντ in
front of it. (The masculine singular form is explained below in “For the Curious”.)
Did You Know ...

That the first published Greek NT was prepared by the Dutch Catholic
scholar Erasmus in 1516? He based his Greek text on approximately
six manuscripts, the oldest dated in the 1200s. A later edition of his
text became the foundation for many of the famous early English
translations including the King James Version of 1611.
2. See box “For the Curious” on page 79 for explanation on how this and other nominative singulars are formed.
78 LESSON 7
Forming the Present and Future Active Voice Participles

Simply add the verb stem, and for the future, the tense identifier, just as was done for the
verb: [Observe that in these forms, two Minimums exist—as the red ink shows.]
(See Appendix F for the complete list of forms with their translations)
Present tense: Add the verb stem.

λύ–ων λύ–ον λύ–ουσα
λύ–οντος λύ–οντος λυ–ούσης
etc. etc. etc.
Future tense: Add a σ to form the future active.
λύσων λύσον λύσουσα
λύσοντος λύσοντος λυσούσης
etc. etc. etc.
Forming the Aorist Active and Passive Voice Participles
Aorist active: Replace the ο/ου “connecting vowel” with tense identifier –σα
λύσας λύσαν λύσασα
λύσαντος λύσαντος λυσάσης
etc. etc. etc.
Aorist passive voice: Replace the ο/ου with tense identifier –θε or -θει in the fem.(The
aorist passive tense identifier [–θη] sees the η shorten to an ε = θε instead of θη.) The
genitive form is the key.
λυθείς λυθέν λυθεῖσα
λυθέντος λυθέντος λυθεῖσης
etc. etc. etc.
Perfect tense: insert the κ and drop the ν in the masculine and neuter; for the perfect
active feminine, replace the ουσ with κυι
λελυκώς λελυκός λελυκυῖα
λελυκότος λελυκότος λελυκυῖας
etc. etc. etc.
The Nominatives
The formation of the nominative case is unpredictable, but remember, you do not have to
know how the changes took place—it has already been done for you. But, for those who
are curious enough to check, see the box on the next page.
Minimum Six 79
For the Curious

(Not Required)
The material given here accounts for the irregular spelling of the singular nominative case of the masculine
and neuter nominative singular forms. [This information helps explain the nominative singular of the
Third Declension. See page 38.]
To account for these irregular forms, we give some points in review.
1. Remember, masculine and neuter participles use the endings of the Third Declension: either (1) – (no
letter) or (2 ) –ς, with the Greek –οντ in front of these endings. [See Minimum Two, the Endings of the
Third Declension.]
2. The Primary tenses (present and future) use the first option, namely, no letter following the –οντ.
3. The secondary tenses: aorist active, aorist passive, and the perfect active, use the second option: the
sigma (ς) follows the –οντ.
With these reminders, let us follow the steps that occur in giving us the nominative singulars for these
two Third Declension options.
The Present Tense
Step One: The first optional ending for the Third Declension is: no letter added. This means we end
up with: —οντ.
Step Two: In Greek, a word cannot end with a τ, so the τ dropped off, leaving –oν for the neuter;
for the masculine, the ο (of –οντ) lengthened to compensate in the masculine, leaving –ων.
The future tense simply adds its identifier in front of this ending = —σων.
We now show what happened for the two aorist tenses for the masculine singular.
Aorist Active
Step One: The tense identifier (–σα) replaced the ο (of the –οντ), giving us, with the added Third
Declension ς –σαντς. λύ–σαντς.
Step Two: In Greek, the letters ντ cannot precede σ, so they drop out, and we are left with the NT
form: λύσας for the masculine form.
Aorist Passive
Step One: The tense identifier (–θε) replaced the ο (of the –οντ), giving us, with the added third
declension ς –θεντς. λυ–θεντς.
Step Two: In Greek, the letters ντ cannot precede σ, so they drop out, and the ε lengthened to ει to
compensate, leaving us with the NT form: λυθείς for the masculine form. This is a very common
form in the NT (ἀποκριθείς—to cite one example, a word that occurs 94 times in the NT in this
very form).
The neuter gender and the perfect tense formations follow the same rationale.
80 LESSON 7
Translation of the Active Voice Participles3

Without the article
λύων loosing
λύσων will be loosing
λύσας having loosed
λελυκώς having loosed [with effect still present]
With the article
ὁ λύων The [one] loosing
ὁ λύσων The [one] who will loose
ὁ λύσας The [one] having loosed
ὁ λελυκώς The [one] having loosed [with effect still present]
NOTE: While the translations given here are of the nominative case, the participles in the
other cases (genitive, dative and accusative) have precisely the same case function as the
case function for nouns, pronouns and adjectives.
For example: the genitive case of the participle of λύω would be λύοντος and its
translation would be: “of the one loosing” or “from the one loosing.” The dative, λύοντι,
would be: “to, for, at, with, by, in, the one loosing.”
Remember...
t The endings for the masculine and neuter genders are the same as the endings of
the third declension, already learned.
t We simply insert the Greek “οντ” before third declension endings (Minimum
Two) for the masculine and neuter participles (the genitive ending –ος) giving us
οντος, and insert “ουσ” in front of the first declension endings (Minimum One)
for the feminine participles giving us ουσα.
t The endings of the feminine gender follow the endings of the γλῶσσα model
(see page 27).
t In the neuter gender, we again observe that the nominatives and accusatives are the
same, and that the neuter gender again agrees with the masculine in both the genitive
and dative singular and plural.
3. See Appendix F for a table giving the translations of verbs and participles.
Minimum Six 81
PART FOUR: The Middle/Passive Voice Participle
The middle/passive participle is built on the first and second declensions (Minimum One).
Here, it would be helpful to review Minimum One from Lesson 3 or from the list of
minimums in Appendix L. All middle/passive participles have the endings of the first
and second declensions—given in red in the following table with –μεν inserted right in
front of those endings.
Minimum Six – B
The Middle/Passive Participle

SINGULAR
Nom. –μεν ος –μεν ον –μεν η
Gen. –μεν ου –μεν ης
Dat. –μεν ῳ –μεν ῃ
Acc. –μεν ον –μεν ην
PLURAL
Nom. –μεν οι –μεν α –μεν αι
Gen. –μεν ων –μεν ων
Dat. –μεν οις –μεν αις
Acc. –μεν ους –μεν ας
Tense Formation of the Middle/Passive Participle

All we have to do now is insert a tense identifier (Minimum Four) in front of these
unchanging endings and the verb stem, and we are done!
Remember This
Whenever you see “μεν” in front of the endings of the first and second declensions
(Minimum One), you know you have a middle/passive participle! This never changes.
82 LESSON 7
t Present tense: insert the connecting vowel “ο” (the ο/ου of the present tense verb
forms) = –ομενος.
t Future tense: place a σ in front of the connecting vowel (just as we added a σ to
the future tense verb = –σομενος.4
t Aorist tense, middle voice: replace the connecting vowel with σα—just as we did
with the verb = –σαμενος. (Do not forget, the aorist passive is built on the active
voice—the participle of εἰμί.)
t Perfect tense, middle and passive voices: delete the connecting vowel—just as we
did for the perfect middle and passive verb = _μενος.
Add the verb stem for the finished product:
Verb stem Tense identifier μεν + endings of ἀγαθός
λυ ο μεν ος (present)
λυ σο μεν ος (future)
λυ σα μεν ος (aorist middle)
λελυ _ μεν ος (perfect)
Thus, you may observe that the only change that occurs is with the tense identifier—
the information in the second column. (Of course, the perfect participle has an augment
and is the only one that does.)
Translation of the Middle/Passive Participle

Translation without the article:
λυόμενος being loosed
λυσόμενος will be loosed
λυσάμενος having loosed oneself
λελύ_μενος having been loosed [with effect still present]
Translation with the article:
ὁ λυόμενος The [one] being loosed
ὁ λυσόμενος The [one] who will be loosed
ὁ λυσάμενος Τhe [one] having loosed himself
ὁ λελύ_μενος The [one] having been loosed [with effect still present]
4. The future passive participle has –θησ just as the verb does, but we do not learn it because it shows up just one time in the
NT, in Heb. 3:5, and even there is can be recognized without learning the entire declension.
Minimum Six 83
Simple Rule: Just look for the –μεν in the word, followed by the endings of ἀγαθός. The
tense is also readily identified by the letter(s) or absence of a letter right in front of the –μεν.
This makes the middle/passive participle one of the easiest forms in all the NT to recognize.
Here is a table that gives the translations of the participle with the articles:
The Participle (as masculine substantive)

The other genders follow these translations with their own form.
Present Active ὁ λύων The one loosing
Middle ὁ λυόμενος The one loosing (for) himself
Passive ὁ λυόμενος The one being loosed
Future Active ὁ λύσων The one who will loose
Middle ὁ λυσόμενος The one who will loose (for) himself
Passive ὁ λυθησόμενος The one who will be loosed
Aorist Active ὁ λύσας The one who loosed
Middle ὁ λυσάμενος The one who loosed (for) himself
Passive ὁ λυθείς The one who was loosed
Perfect Active ὁ λελυκώς The one having loosed
Middle ὁ λελυμένος The one having loosed (for) himself
Passive ὁ λελυμένος The one having been loosed
(See Appendix F for the complete forms with their translations)
PART FIVE: Exercises
Part One (Tense Recognition)

1. ἔφαγον τὸν ἀρτὸν ὃν ὁ κύριος ἔπεμπεν αὐτοῖς
2. ἐσθίομεν, ἐφάγομεν, ἠσθίομεν
3. γίνεται, ἐγίνετο, ἐγένετο

84 LESSON 7
4. ἔβαλλον, ἔβαλον, βάλλω
5. εἶδον, βλέπω, ἔβλεπον
Part Two (Present Tense Participle)

1. ὁ ἀγαπῶν τοὺς πιστεύοντας τὰς ἐντολὰς αὐτοῦ θεὸς ἐστίν
2. οἱ καταβαίνοντες οὐκ εἰσὶν (from εἰμί) oἱ ἀναβαίνοντες, ὅτι εἰσὶν

κακοί
3. Ἰησοῦς λέγει καὶ ἔλεγεν καὶ εἶπεν τῷ βλέποντι τὸ φῶς, σὺ εἶ (from

εἰμί) ὁ μαθητής μου
Part Three (Participles in Different Tenses)

1. ὁ ἀγαπῶν τοὺς πιστεύσαντας καὶ τοὺς ποιήσαντας τὰς ἐντολὰς
αὐτοῦ θεὸς ἐστίν
2. ὁ διδάσκων τὴν ἀλήθειαν οὐκ ἔστιν ἀπὸ τὸυ πονηρόυ, ὅτι ἐστίν ὁ
προφήτης τοῦ κυρίου
3. ἀποκριθεῖς, Ἰησοῦς ἐδίδασκεν αὐτοῖς ἐν ταῖς παραβολαῖς
4. τῷ διδάσκοντι, τῷ διδάξαντι, τῷ ἠκολουθηκότι
5. ἔλεγεν οὖν Ἰησοῦς πρὸς τοὺς πεπιστευκότας ...
6. Ιησοῦς εἶπεν τῷ βλέψαντι τὸ φῶς, σὺ εἶ (from εἰμί) ὁ μαθητής μου
7. εἰ ἐν τῇ ζωῇ ταύτῃ ἐν Χριστῷ ἠλπικότες ἐσμὲν μόνον, ἐλεεινότεροι

[most pitiable] πάντων ἀνθρώπων ἐσμέν (1 Cor. 15:19).
8. ἀκούσας δὲ ὁ βασιλεὺς Ἡρῴδης, καὶ πέμψας αὐτοὺς εἰς Βηθλέεμ

εἶπεν· πορευθέντες ...
Lesson
Minimum Seven
8 The Subjunctive and
Imperative Modes
In This Lesson:
► Vocabulary
► Introduction to the Modes
► Minimum Seven-A The Subjunctive Mode
► Minimum Seven-B The Imperative Mode
► Translating Subjunctives and Imperatives
► More Information on Infinitives
► More Information on the 2 Aorist—The
Copycat Tense
► Exercises
86 LESSON 8
Part A.
ἄν untranslatable, used to make a definite statement
contingent upon something. Notice the effect of ἄν
in the two words, ὅτε and εἶ below
ἐάν if (ει + αν)—but this “if ” carries a new connotation,
discussed below.
ὁ καρπός fruit, crop, result

ὁ λαός people, crowd
λοιπός, –όν, –ή adj.: remaining, left; noun: the rest; adv.: from now
on
μακάριος, –όν, –ά blessed, happy
μέλλω I am about to ...
μή no, not, lest [form of the negative in the subjunctive
and imperative modes]
μηδέ neither
μηδείς, –έν, –μία not one, nothing
ἡ ὁδός way
ὅταν whenever (ὅτε + ἄν)
ὅτε when (but add αν to the word and we have:
οὔτε and not, neither, nor
οὐχί not, emphatic no (no indeed)
πείθω I persuade, convince
πίνω I drink
πλείων more (comparative of πολυς)
τό πλοῖον boat
πρεσβύτερος, –ον, –α elder
προσκυνέω I worship
Minimum Seven 87
τό πρόσωπον face
τρεῖς, τρία three [trio and the Spanish and French “three’]
Part B.
ἄρχω active: I rule; middle: I begin
δοξάζω I glorify, praise, honor
ἐγείρω I raise up
εὐαγγελίζω I evangelize
εὑρίσκω I find [Eureka]
ἴδιος, –ον, –α one’s own (e.g., people, home) [idiosyncrasy]
ἡ κεφαλή head
ὁ νόμος law [nomenclature=law or system of naming ...]
ἡ σοφία wisdom [philosophy=love of wisdom]
σπείρω I sow [cf. σπερμα: seed=sperm]
τέ...τέ and, likewise, and so
τοιοῦτος, –οῦτον, –αύτη such as
ὁ τόπος place [topography]
ὑπάγω I depart
ὑπάρχω I exist, am present (τα ὑπάρχοντα: possessions)
φέρω I bear
φημί I say
ἡ ψυχή life, nature, soul (versus spirit)
ὡς as
PART TWO: The Three Modes in Koine Greek

t Indicative: (Indicates a fact) I read a book.
t Subjunctive: (Shows uncertainty in a fact) I may read a book
t Imperative: (Commands something be done) Read the book!
88 LESSON 8
As indicated earlier, a fourth mode, the optative mode, also occurs. It shows up in the NT just 68
times and its importance is mentioned in the discussion on conditional sentences in Lesson 10.
We have learned the indicative up to this point. Here are some review points about the
indicative mode:
t It is used for all tenses: The Primary tenses (present, future) and the Secondary
tenses (imperfect, aorist, and perfect).
t The Secondary tenses have an augment: “ε” for “earlier”—that is, earlier than the
present.
For the other two modes (the subjunctive and the imperative):
t The Greek uses only two tenses: the present tense and the aorist tense. (There are ten
places where the old perfect subjunctive of οἶδα occur.)
t Why? In these two modes the Greek wants to merely distinguish between
“continuous” action (the present tense) and “point” action (the aorist tense).
What does this mean?
t Point = start doing something that has not been done
t Continuous or linear = continue doing something that is already being done.
t Examples in English: I (may) start to study (aorist), or, I (may) go on
studying (present).
t Unfortunately, English translations often do not reflect these differences,
translating both as: I (may) study.
t Only the primary tense endings are used as a foundation for these two
modes.
t Therefore, since it is the secondary endings that require an augment (ε) and we are
not using the secondary endings for the subjunctive and the imperative, the aorist
subjunctive and the aorist imperative do not have an augment.
Remember This
The aorist tense has an ε augment only in the indicative mode. There is no augment
for the aorist participle, the infinitive and the subjunctive and imperative modes.
Minimum Seven 89
PART THREE: The Subjunctive Mode
The minimum for the subjunctive mode is the subjunctive of εἰμί. As noted above, all
subjunctives, including the subjunctive of εἰμί, are built on the primary endings. For
review, we give these two sets of primary endings here (two of the four “basics”):
PRIMARY ACTIVE PRIMARY MIDDLE/PASSIVE
1 –ω –ομαι
SG 2 –εις –ῃ
3 –ει –εται
1 –ομεν –ομεθα
PL 2 –ετε –εσθε
3 –ουσι(ν) –ονται
There are just two steps you need to take to form the five different forms of the
subjunctive:
Step 1:
t Lengthen the connecting vowel (ο/ου becomes ω and ε becomes η in the forms you
have already learned)
t This is the result. In the second and third persons singular, the iota becomes
subscripted so that it actually looks like: –ῃς and –ῃ, respectively, in the NT.
PRIMARY ACTIVE PRIMARY MIDDLE/PASSIVE
1 ω ωμαι
SG 2 ηις ῃ
3 ηι ηται
1 ωμεν ωμεθα
PL 2 ητε ησθε
3 ωσι(ν) ωνται
t So the finished product in the active, the Minimum itself, looks like:
90 LESSON 8
Minimum Seven –A
Subjunctive of εἰμί
1 ὦ
SG 2 ᾖς
3 ᾖ
1 ὦμεν
PL 2 ἦτε
3 ὦσι(ν)
This very form is the subjunctive of εἰμί, and is the only one of the five subjunctive forms
that can stand alone, that is, it does not require a verb stem to complete the word—just as
is the case with the indicative form and participle of εἰμί. (Of course, it can have a verb
stem attached, it is just that it is not required, to be a proper word.) The middle/passive
and all three aorist forms above require a verb stem.
Subjunctive of εἰμί Indicative of εἰμί
1 ὦ I may be εἰμί I am
SG 2 ᾖς You may be εἶ You are
3 ᾖ He, she or it may be ἐστίν He, she or it is
1 ὦμεν We may be ἐσμέν We are

PL 2 ἦτε You may be ἐστέ You are
3 ὦσι(ν) They may be εἰσί(ν) They are
t Do not forget: these words (the verb “to be”) always call for the nominative case:
ἦτε οἱ μαθηταί μου or, ἐστέ οἱ μαθηταί μου =
You may be my disciples (subjunctive) or You are my disciples (indicative).
t In both cases, “disciples” is nominative because of the verb “to be”—εἰμί—whether
indicative or subjunctive.
t The same is true for the imperative mode of εἰμί (see Mark 5:34).
Minimum Seven 91
Step 2:
t The present tense simply adds a verb stem for all voices.
t The aorist tense inserts an abbreviated tense identifier to the endings.
t Thus, for the aorist active and aorist middle, insert a sigma (σ instead of σα) in
front of the active and middle endings, respectively.
t For the aorist passive, insert a theta (θ instead of θη) in front of the active ending
(once again, the aorist passive is built on the active form—as is the case for the aorist
passive in all of its formations: verbs in all modes and participles and infinitives).
The results look like this (note that the endings within the blocks are all the same, and that
the key to the tense identification of the tense/voice is what immediately precedes the blocked
endings).
[See Appendix F for translations.]
The first three subjunctives are built on the Primary active.
Present active
1 λύ ω
SG 2 λύ ῃς
3 λύ ῃ
1 λύ ωμεν
PL 2 λύ ητε
3 λύ ωσι(ν)
Aorist active
1 λύσ ω
SG 2 λύσ ῃς
3 λύσ ῃ
1 λύσ ωμεν
PL 2 λύσ ητε
3 λύσ ωσι(ν)
92 LESSON 8
Aorist passive
1 λύθ ω
SG 2 λύθ ῃς
3 λύθ ῃ
1 λύθ ωμεν
PL 2 λύθ ητε
3 λύθ ωσι(ν)
The last two subjunctives are built on the Primary middle/passive.
Present middle/passive
1 λύ ωμαι
SG 2 λύ ῃ
3 λύ ηται
1 λυ ώμεθα
PL 2 λύ ησθε
3 λύ ωνται
Aorist middle
1 λύσ ωμαι
SG 2 λύσ ῃ
3 λύσ ηται
1 λυσ ώμεθα
PL 2 λύσ ησθε
3 λύσ ωνται
Remember This
Once we move out of the indicative mode, the ε augment is found only in the
perfect—never loses the augment. This is particularly helpful in tense recognition
with participles because the perfect tense is the only participle with an augment.
Minimum Seven 93
New Testament Translation
It is often difficult to reflect the differences between the Greek aorist subjunctive and the
Greek present subjunctive—point action versus linear or continuous action. Many times,
therefore, in the English versions, the translation will not tell us which tense was used.
Knowing the Greek, however, allows you to make the distinctions in your use of the
passage, be that in teaching or preaching—in which you can make the text come to life far
beyond the constrictions of translation guidelines. Examples of this are given following the
discussion on the imperative mode.
PART FOUR: The Imperative Mode
Minimum Seven–B
Imperative Mode
SG 2
3 –τω
PL 2
3 –τωσαν
The Minimum for this mode is the two endings: –τω and –τωσαν. They are discussed
below.
t As in English, this is the mode of “command”—the ordering of someone to do

something. [You] listen to me!—in which the “you” is understood.
t The same translation principle we spoke about for the subjunctive applies to the
imperative, namely, we are concerned solely with continuous (linear) or point
action, and therefore need just the same two tenses to convey these distinctions
(the present and aorist tenses).
t Illustration: Are we commanding someone to start doing something (aorist) or
to continue doing something they are already doing (present)? [Begin to] pay
attention (aorist); [Continue to] pay attention (present).
94 LESSON 8
There is one important difference in the Greek Imperative from the English Imperative.
t In English, we have just two forms, a command for someone (singular) to do
something, or a command for some persons (plural) to do something.
t In Greek, though, there are four forms, two singular and two plural. The difference
is easy to explain.
t The Greek wants to distinguish between the command to have the person you are
speaking to [You—(singular or plural)] do something, and the command to have
the person you are speaking to command a third party to do something.
t The command to the person being addressed (either singular or plural) would be:
Read the book!
t This corresponds exactly with the English imperative.
t Different from English is the command to have a third party do something (either
singular or plural): You have someone else do ...
We now turn to the actual formations. To make this as down–to–earth as possible, we
mention a pattern that occurs in all five forms of the imperative mode.
Making the Imperative Easy (See Appendix F for the complete forms with
their translations)
There is a pattern in three of the four imperative forms for both the active and the middle/
passive conjugations.
SINGULAR PLURAL
2. (different) similar (and the same as the indicative)
3. similar similar
Observe the letters in red of the following conjugations (–τω and –τωσαν):
Present active (Insert connecting vowel—always ε)
λύε λύετε
λυέτω λυέτωσαν
Aorist active (replace connecting vowel with –σα)
λύσον λύσατε
λυσάτω λυσάτωσαν
Minimum Seven 95
Aorist passive (replace connecting vowel with –θη)
λύθητι λύθητε
λυθήτω λυθήτωσαν
Present middle/passive
λύου λύεσθε
λυέσθω λυέσθωσαν
Aorist middle
λύσαι λύσασθε
λυσάσθω λυσάσθωσαν
Notes on the formations

t We use the same tense identifiers as previously, Minimum Four, (with the aorist
passive again built on the active voice).
t The second person plural is identical to the indicative for all three voices, so in
these places context determines whether you have an indicative or an imperative.
t The second person singular is different for all five forms and must be recognized
by memorization.
t The remaining two forms: add —τω (third singular) and —τωσαν (third plural)
to the present active and aorist active/passive, and for the other three conjugations
in the third person, substitute the “τ” with a “σθ” = —σθω and –σθωσαν.
PART FIVE: Translating the Subjunctive and Imperative

In Appendix F the distinctive differences between these two tenses are illustrated. A clear
example, however, about the importance is given here from the New Testament. In Luke
14:12, the New Revised Standard Version, along with all other major English translations,
translates the imperative in a misleading way.
He said also to the one who had invited him, “When you give a luncheon or a dinner, do
not invite your friends or your brothers or your relatives or rich neighbors, in case they
may invite you in return, and you would be repaid (emphasis supplied).
The imperative: “do not invite” sounds like a clearly stated prohibition to ever inviting
96 LESSON 8
your friends, your brothers (which is a word for fellow church members), your relatives
and rich neighbors. The prohibition as translated here would be accurate if it were an
aorist imperative. But it is not. It is a present imperative, the tense that conveys ongoing
action. It should, therefore, be translated something like: “do not only invite,” or “do not
continually invite” to the exclusion of the outcasts. See Appendix F.
PART SIX: More Information on Infinitives

In Lesson 5 the infinitive was introduced. There it was noted that the infinitive completes
the verbal idea and is translated with the English “to” in front of it. Example: I am able to
walk.
t The “to walk” is the infinitive, completing the verb “I am able.”
t We saw that the present active infinitive has an –ειν on the end of the verb—
λύειν to loose.
t Hence, δύναμαι λύειν = I am able to loose.
Here are the forms of all the infinitives in Greek with information about the form and the
function.
Present active: λύειν, to loose (go on loosing). Remember, the copycat 2 aorist active
also has the -ειν ending.
All other infinitives end with: αι—making it easy to recognize an infinitive, underlined
in the list below, and the tense and voice of the infinitive can be determined by the tense
identifiers, highlighted in red.
Present middle/passive λύεσθαι To be loosed (go on being…)
Aorist active λύσαι To loose (start to loose)
Aorist middle λύσασθαι To loose oneself (start to…)
Aorist passive λυθήναι To be loosed (start to be…)
Perfect active λελυκέναι To have loosed
Perfect middle/passive λελύ_σθαι To have been loosed
The Future infinitive occurs only five times in the NT; four of them are in the book of
Acts, and all four are the future infinitive of εἰμί ἔσεσθαι. They are part of the
construction called the “Accusative of General Reference” discussed in Lesson 10. Each
carries the notion of “would” or “will” happen.
Minimum Seven 97
Notes on the Formations
t The aorist tense adds the tense identifier.
t The aorist passive is again built on the active voice
t The 2 aorist, not given here, is the same as the present tense (copycat)
Remember This
Every infinitive in the NT ends with -αι except the present active and the copycat
2 aorist active (both end with the common -ειν ending). Infinitives, are therefore
easy to spot. Tense identifiers complete the recogniton.
Notes on the Translations

The dynamics mentioned in the discussion on the subjunctive and imperative modes about
continuing action versus point action apply here.
t In the English translations of the Bible it is usually impossible to know what tense
is used in the Greek. But it does make a difference, and this is where the expositor
can make some important points in the pulpit or classroom.
t Examples: the infinitives in the present tense and the aorist tense (λύειν, λύσαι,
respectively) are both translated “to loose.” The student of Greek knows, however,
that what is occurring in Greek is the concept of continuing action for the present
tense: “to go on loosing,” and the concept of “point” action for the aorist tense: “to
begin to loose.”
Did You Know ...

That the brilliant and godly man who is responsible for approximately
80 percent of the English used in the King James Version was
burned at the stake as a heretic by the Church of England? The story
of this dedicated Christian scholar, William Tyndale, is an inspiration
to read.
98 LESSON 8
PART SEVEN: More Information on the 2 Aorist—The Copycat

Tense
In Lesson 5 we pointed out that in the indicative mode the 2 aorist has the same endings
as the imperfect tense. In all other modes, as well as in the participle and in infinitives,
the 2 aorist copies the present tense. Here is a demonstration of this phenomenon. The
similarities are emphasized.
PRESENT TENSE 2 AORIST TENSE
Participle, active λαμβάν-ων λάβ-ων
Participle, mid./pass. λαμβαν-όμενος λαβ-όμενος
Infinitive, active λαμβάν-ειν λάβ-ειν
Infinitive, mid./pass. λαμβάν-εσθαι λάβ-εσθαι
Subjunctive, active λαμβάν-ωμεν λάβ-ωμεν
Subjunctive, mid./pass. λαμβάν-ωμαι λάβ-ωμαι
Imperative, active λαμβάν-ε λάβ-ε
Imperative, mid./pass. λαμβάν-ου λάβ-ου
In all of the above forms, the endings are identical. Only the verb stem has changed.
PART EIGHT: Exercises
Exercises–1
John 3:1 Ἦν δὲ ἄνθρωπος ἐκ τῶν Φαρισαίων [sound out], Νικόδημος [sound
out] ὄνομα αὐτῷ, ἄρχων τῶν Ἰουδαίων·[sound out] 2 οὗτος ἦλθεν πρὸς αὐτὸν
νυκτὸς καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ, Ῥαββί [sound out], οἴδαμεν ὅτι ἀπὸ θεοῦ ἐρχόμενος
διδάσκαλος· οὐδεὶς γὰρ δύναται ταῦτα τὰ σημεῖα ποιεῖν ἃ σὺ ποιεῖς, ἐὰν μὴ
ᾖ ὁ θεὸς μετ᾿ αὐτοῦ. 3 ἀπεκρίθη Ἰησοῦς καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ, Ἀμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω
σοι, ἐὰν μή τις γεννηθῇ ἄνωθεν, οὐ δύναται ἰδεῖν τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ. 4
λέγει πρὸς αὐτὸν [ὁ] Νικόδημος, Πῶς δύναται ἄνθρωπος γεννηθῆναι γέρων
[old] ὤν; μὴ δύναται εἰς τον κοιλίαν [womb] τῆς μητρὸς αὐτοῦ δεύτερον [sound
Minimum Seven 99
out] εἰσελθεῖν καὶ γεννηθῆναι; 5 ἀπεκρίθη Ἰησοῦς, Ἀμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω σοι,
ἐὰν μή τις γεννηθῇ ἐξ ὕδατος καὶ πνεύματος, οὐ δύναται εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν
βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ. 6 τὸ γεγεννημένον ἐκ τῆς σαρκὸς σάρξ ἐστιν, καὶ τὸ
γεγεννημένον ἐκ τοῦ πνεύματος πνεῦμά ἐστιν. 7 μὴ θαυμάσῃς [marvel] ὅτι
εἶπόν σοι, Δεῖ ὑμᾶς γεννηθῆναι [Acc. of general reference—see Lesson 10] ἄνωθεν.
8 τὸ πνεῦμα ὅπου θέλει πνεῖ [blows] καὶ τὴν φωνὴν αὐτοῦ ἀκούεις, ἀλλ᾿
οὐκ οἶδας πόθεν [from where] ἔρχεται καὶ ποῦ ὑπάγει· οὕτως ἐστὶν πᾶς ὁ
γεγεννημένος ἐκ τοῦ πνεύματος. 9 ἀπεκρίθη Νικόδημος καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ,
Πῶς δύναται ταῦτα γενέσθαι; 10 ἀπεκρίθη Ἰησοῦς καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ, Σὺ εἶ ὁ
διδάσκαλος τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ καὶ ταῦτα οὐ γινώσκεις; 11 ἀμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω σοι
ὅτι ὃ οἴδαμεν λαλοῦμεν καὶ ὃ ἑωράκαμεν μαρτυροῦμεν, καὶ τὴν μαρτυρίαν
ἡμῶν οὐ λαμβάνετε. 12 εἰ τὰ ἐπίγεια [observe: επι + γῆ] εἶπον ὑμῖν καὶ οὐ
πιστεύετε, πῶς ἐὰν εἴπω ὑμῖν τὰ ἐπουράνια [look at the parts] πιστεύσετε;
13 καὶ οὐδεὶς ἀναβέβηκεν [a 2 perfect of ἀναβαίνω] εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν εἰ μὴ ὁ
ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καταβάς, ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου. 14 καὶ καθὼς Μωϋσῆς
ὕψωσεν [lifted up] τὸν ὄφιν [serpent] ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ [wilderness], οὕτως ὑψωθῆναι
[aorist passive infinitive] δεῖ τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου [Acc. of general reference—see
Lesson 10], 15 ἵνα πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων ἐν αὐτῷ ἔχῃ ζωὴν αἰώνιον. 16 Οὕτως
γὰρ ἠγάπησεν ὁ θεὸς τὸν κόσμον, ὥστε τὸν υἱὸν τὸν μονογενῆ ἔδωκεν,
ἵνα πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων εἰς αὐτὸν μὴ ἀπόληται ἀλλ᾿ ἔχῃ ζωὴν αἰώνιον. 17 οὐ
γὰρ ἀπέστειλεν ὁ θεὸς τὸν υἱὸν εἰς τὸν κόσμον ἵνα κρίνῃ [condemn] τὸν
κόσμον, ἀλλ᾿ ἵνα σωθῇ ὁ κόσμος δι᾿ αὐτοῦ. 18 ὁ πιστεύων εἰς αὐτὸν οὐ
κρίνεται [condemned]· ὁ δὲ μὴ πιστεύων ἤδη κέκριται [has been judged], ὅτι μὴ
πεπίστευκεν εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ μονογενοῦς [look at the parts] υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ.
100 LESSON 8
Exercises–2
John 3:19 αὕτη δέ ἐστιν ἡ κρίσις [sound out] ὅτι τὸ φῶς ἤλθεν εἰς τὸν κόσμον
καὶ ἠγάπησαν οἱ ἄνθρωποι μᾶλλον τὸ σκότος [context] ἢ τὸ φῶς· ἦν γὰρ
αὐτῶν πονηρὰ τὰ ἔργα. 20 πᾶς γὰρ ὁ φαῦλα [sound out] πράσσων [acting,
practicing=πραξις] μισεῖ [hates] τὸ φῶς καὶ οὐκ ἔρχεται πρὸς τὸ φῶς, ἵνα μὴ
ἐλεγχθῇ [be exposed] τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ. 21 ὁ δὲ ποιῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἔρχεται πρὸς
τὸ φῶς, ἵνα φανερωθῇ αὐτοῦ τὰ ἔργα ὅτι ἐν θεῷ ἐστιν [neuter plural nouns often
have a verb in the singular]. 22 Μετὰ ταῦτα ἦλθεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς καὶ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ
εἰς τὴν Ἰουδαίαν [sound out] γῆν καὶ ἐκεῖ ἔμενον μετ᾿ αὐτῶν καὶ ἐβάπτιζεν. 23
ἦν δὲ καὶ ὁ Ἰωάννης βαπτίζων ἐν Αἰνὼν [sound out] ἐγγὺς [near] τοῦ] Σαλείμ
[sound out], ὅτι ὕδατα πολλὰ ἦν ἐκεῖ, καὶ παρεγίνοντο [παρα and γινομαι] καὶ
ἐβαπτίζοντο· 24 οὔπω γὰρ ἦν βεβλημένος [from βαλλω] εἰς τὴν φυλακὴν ὁ
Ἰωάννης. 25 Ἐγένετο οὖν ζήτησις [dispute] ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν Ἰωάννου μετὰ
Ἰουδαίου περὶ καθαρισμοῦ [purification]. 26 καὶ ἦλθον πρὸς τὸν Ἰωάννην καὶ
εἶπαν αὐτῷ, Ῥαββί, ὃς ἦν μετὰ σοῦ πέραν [beyond] τοῦ Ἰορδάνου [sound out],
ᾧ σὺ μεμαρτύρηκας, ἴδε οὗτος βαπτίζει καὶ πάντες ἔρχονται πρὸς αὐτόν.
27 ἀπεκρίθη Ἰωάννης καὶ εἶπεν, Οὐ δύναται ἄνθρωπος λαμβάνειν οὐδὲ ἓν
ἐὰν μὴ ᾖ δεδομένον αὐτῷ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ. 28 αὐτοὶ ὑμεῖς μοι μαρτυρεῖτε
ὅτι εἶπον [ὅτι] Οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγὼ ὁ Χριστός, ἀλλ᾿ ὅτι Ἀπεσταλμένος [a liquid] εἰμὶ
ἔμπροσθεν [before] ἐκείνου.... 30 ἐκεῖνον δεῖ αὐξάνειν, ἐμὲ δὲ ἐλαττοῦσθαι.
31 Ὁ ἄνωθεν ἐρχόμενος ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν· ὁ ὢν ἐκ τῆς γῆς ἐκ τῆς γῆς
ἐστιν καὶ ἐκ τῆς γῆς λαλεῖ. ὁ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἐρχόμενος [ἐπάνω πάντων
ἐστίν·] 32 ὃ ἑώρακεν καὶ ἤκουσεν τοῦτο μαρτυρεῖ, καὶ τὴν μαρτυρίαν αὐτοῦ
οὐδεὶς λαμβάνει. 33 ὁ λαβὼν αὐτοῦ τὴν μαρτυρίαν ἐσφράγισεν ὅτι ὁ θεὸς
ἀληθής ἐστιν.
Lesson
9 Minimum Eight
The –µi Verb
In This Lesson:
► Vocabulary
► Introduction to the –μι Verb
► Minimum Eight
► Summary of Features
► Principal Parts
► Exercises
102 LESSON 9

αἴρω I raise, take up, take away
ἀνίστημι I rise up, stand [ἀνάστασις=resurrection /
Anastasia]
ὁ ἄρτος bread, loaf, food
ἀφίημι I let go, leave, forgive, divorce
δίδωμι / ἔδωκα I give / I gave
δύο two [duet]
εἴτε if, whether
ἕκαστος, –όν, –ή each, every
ἕτερος, –όν, –ά other, another, different [heterosexual]
ἔτι still, yet, even
ζάω I live [ζωή]
τό ἱερόν temple
τό ἱμάτιον garment
ἵστημι I place, set, stand
παραδίδωμι I give over, betray [παράδοσις=tradition]
τίθημι / ἔθηκα I put, place; make / I placed
PART TWO: Introduction to the –μι Verb

t The –μι verb ends with –μι in its vocabulary form, the first person singular, instead
of –ω, as in λύω.
t [λύω was probably λύομι at one time. The –μι dropped and the omicron
lengthened to omega.]
t In the time the NT was written this form of the verb was disappearing, but several
important verbs were still common and show up in the NT.
t You have already been introduced to the most important one, εἰμί (I am), occurring
most of the time in the NT in the third person singular, ἐστίν (he, it, she, is).
Minimum Eight 103
PART THREE: Minimum Eight
Minimum Eight consists of memorizing the four points below.
Minimum Eight
The –μι Verb
1. Stem Vowel may be short or long.

δο / δω (δίδωμι)
θε / θη (τίθημι)
στα / στη (ἳστημι)
ε / η (ἀφίημι)
2. Iota reduplication occurs only in present and imperfect tenses.

Observe the iota at the beginning of these key –μι verbs:
δίδωμι
τίθημι
ἳστημι
ἀφίημι (third letter)
If there is an iota, the verb has to be present or imperfect; if imperfect, there is an

augment.
3. All other tenses do not have the iota reduplication and the endings follow the
omega conjugation (λύω).
4. The aorist tense identifier is usually –κα instead of –σα.
One simple difference exists between the –κα of the perfect tense and the –κα of the
aorist tense of a –μι verb. The perfect tense is recognized by reduplication of the first letter.
These so–called “κ–aorists” do not reduplicate.
104 LESSON 9
Examples:
AORIST PERFECT
ἔδωκα δέδωκα
ἔθηκα τέθεικα
PART FOUR: Summary of –μι Verb Characteristics

t These verbs reduplicate in the present and imperfect tenses with an ι (iota)
between the duplicated consonants.
t This iota occurs only in these two tenses at the beginning of the verb that begins
with a consonant—a key point in recognizing the forms within the NT text.
t An ε (epsilon) augment is used in the indicative mode for all the secondary tenses,
just as in the omega conjugation.
t The connecting vowel (refer to the “four basic verb forms” of Minimum Three)
occurs only in the imperfect and the future tenses. This means that in the other
tenses the ο / ε drops out—another important point for a quick and easy way to
recognize what you see in the NT. See table below.
t The vowel in the stem frequently changes between a short form of the vowel and
the long form [δο/δω and στα/στη and θε/θη].
t The key: watch for the iota between the duplicated consonants.
t If there, it is a present or imperfect. If an imperfect, it will also have an augment
and, of course, the secondary tense endings.
t In the subjunctives, imperatives, and participles, the aorist and present are identical
except for the iota duplication in the present tense. Example:
t Pres. Subj: διδῳ
The letters underlined make up the only difference
t Aor. Subj: δῳ
t The second person singular in the imperative differs, though, just as it did in
the omega conjugation.
Minimum Eight 105
PART FIVE: Principal Parts
The major verbs: [The stem immediately precedes the –μι in the first column and is
underlined.] Here are the principal parts:
PRESENT FUTURE AORIST PERF. ACT PERF. M/P AOR. PASS
δίδωμι δώσω ἔδωκα δέδωκα δέδομαι ἐδόθην
τίθημι θήσω ἔθηκα τέθεικα τέθειμαι ἐτέθην
ἀφίημι ἀφήσω ἄφηκα ——– ἀφέωνται ἀφέθην
ἳστημι στήσω ἓστησα ἓστηκα ——– ἑστάθην
ἓστην
Notes:
t Observe the vowel changes in the stem, referred to above (for example, in row one:
δω and δο).
t The verb ἳστημι has two aorists. The 1 aorist is transitive (I cause to stand),
whereas the 2 aorist is intransitive (I stand).
t The aorist tense identifier for the first three verbs has –κα instead of the expected
–σα; they are, therefore, called –κ aorists. Only ἳστημι has the typical 1 aorist
–σα tense identifier.
t Note the differences between the aorists and the perfects for δίδωμι and τίθημι.
ἀφίημι does not occur in the perfect active and then only in the 3rd person plural
of the passive.
Making It Simple: Once the principal parts are known, the conjugation is regular except
in the present and imperfect.
• τίθημι in the future is: Stem: θη + σ + ω θήσω
• δίδωμι in the aorist is: ε Augment + Stem: δω + κα ἔδωκα
• δίδωμι in the fut. is the stem: δω + σω δώσω
t In other words, all verbs other than the present and imperfect tenses are regular.
Except for the Imperfect, the secondary tenses merely drop the connecting vowel.
t Since the present and imperfect tenses are the only tenses which reduplicate with an
iota, you will always know these tenses too. The difference between the two tenses
with the iota duplication is straightforward: the imperfect adds its augment and has
the secondary endings—both of which distinguish it from the present tense.
106 LESSON 9
PART SIX: Exercises

These verses include –μι verbs and verses you are seeing for the first time—Mark 3)
–μι Verb Passages Within the Exercises (previously assigned)

1. 1 John 2:12a Γράφω ὑμῖν, τεκνία, ὅτι ἀφέωνται ὑμῖν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι διὰ
τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ.
2. John 3:29 ὁ ἔχων τὴν νύμφην [bride] νυμφίος ἐστίν· ὁ δὲ φίλος τοῦ
νυμφίου ὁ ἑστηκὼς καὶ ἀκούων αὐτοῦ χαρᾷ χαίρει διὰ τὴν φωνὴν
τοῦ νυμφίου. αὕτη οὖν ἡ χαρὰ ἡ ἐμὴ πεπλήρωται. …
3. John 3:34 ὃν γὰρ ἀπέστειλεν ὁ θεὸς τὰ ῥήματα τοῦ θεοῦ λαλεῖ, οὐ

γὰρ ἐκ μέτρου δίδωσιν τὸ πνεῦμα.
4. John 3:35 ὁ πατὴρ ἀγαπᾷ τὸν υἱόν καὶ πάντα δέδωκεν ἐν τῇ χειρὶ
αὐτοῦ.
5. John 3:36 ὁ πιστεύων εἰς τὸν υἱὸν ἔχει ζωὴν αἰώνιον· ὁ δὲ ἀπειθῶν τῷ
υἱῷ οὐκ ὄψεται ζωήν, ἀλλ᾿ ἡ ὀργὴ τοῦ θεοῦ μένει ἐπ᾿ αὐτόν.
Working with an unprepared passage
Mark1:1 Ἀρχὴ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ [υἱοῦ θεοῦ]. 2 Καθὼς

γέγραπται ἐν τῷ Ἠσαΐᾳ τῷ προφήτῃ· ἰδοὺ ἀποστέλλω τὸν ἄγγελόν μου
πρὸ προσώπου σου, ὃς κατασκευάσει τὴν ὁδόν σου· 3 φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν
τῇ ἐρήμῳ· ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν κυρίου, εὐθείας ποιεῖτε τὰς τρίβους αὐτοῦ,
4 ἐγένετο Ἰωάννης [ὁ] βαπτίζων ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ καὶ κηρύσσων βάπτισμα
μετανοίας εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν. 5 καὶ ἐξεπορεύετο πρὸς αὐτὸν πᾶσα ἡ
Ἰουδαία χώρα καὶ οἱ Ἱεροσολυμῖται πάντες, καὶ ἐβαπτίζοντο ὑπ᾿ αὐτοῦ ἐν
τῷ Ἰορδάνῃ ποταμῷ ἐξομολογούμενοι τὰς ἁμαρτίας αὐτῶν.
Lesson
10 Basic Syntax
In This Lesson:
► The Genitive Absolute
► The Accusative of General Reference
► Conditional Sentences
► Exercises
108 LESSON 10
Basic Syntax
What is covered in this last lesson are constructions that cause many eager students to give
up Greek because these constructions appear incomprehensible when they compare the
Greek with an English translation.
This lesson makes it possible for you to move forward with confidence in both your
translation and your interpretation.
PART ONE: The Genitive Absolute

In sentences which have two separate actions, NT Greek uses a construction called the
Genitive Absolute to make sure the reader knows which of the two actions is primary and
which is secondary. The secondary action is the Genitive Absolute. [See Appendix H for
many additional examples.]
t The reader can recognize which the secondary line of action is because the ordinarily
expected case for the subject (Nominative) is in the Genitive case, and the ordinarily
expected verb form is in a participle in the Genitive case.
t Illustration in English. There are two activities in the following sentence:
John was speaking on the telephone when the doorbell rang.
t The two distinct actions: John was speaking, and the doorbell rang.
t In English, we clearly recognize that John’s speaking is the major clause. NT
Greek used the Genitive Absolute to convey the same thing, namely, “when
the doorbell rang” is shown to be the secondary line of action by the Genitive
Absolute construction.
t How do I recognize the Greek language way of doing this, and what do I do to
make a smooth English translation?
t Here are the steps:
Possibility of having a Genitive Absolute is:

t Awkward translation. If there is an awkward translation:
t Look for two things, noun or pronoun in the Genitive and a participle in the
Genitive.
Basic Syntax 109
t If these grammatical forms exist, proceed in the following manner:
t Turn the noun or pronoun into a nominative and the participle into a verb that
agrees with the new nominative.
t Add a word such as: while, as, after, during, etc., in front of the newly shaped
clause to show the temporal connection with the main clause.1
We now demonstrate this process: In John 2:3, the Greek reads: καὶ ὑστερήσαντος
οἴνου λέγει ἡ μήτηρ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ πρὸς αὐτόν ...
t Recognize an awkward translation: “and of the having failed of the wine”
t There is a participle in the genitive and a noun in the genitive (underlined)
t Applying the steps produces the following translation: “And when the wine failed,
the mother of Jesus said to him.”
PART TWO: Accusative of General Reference

Observe the close similarities in both recognizing and proceeding with this construction
to the Genitive Absolute.
This construction involves the use of a noun or a pronoun in the accusative case and
an infinitive, neither of which has any grammatical relationship to the main clause, but,
as with the Genitive Absolute, this construction is also a secondary line of action. [See
Appendix H for many more examples.]
t How do I recognize the Accusative of General Reference, and what do I do to make
a smooth English translation?
t Here are the steps and, as mentioned above, note the many parallel steps taken in
dealing with the Genitive Absolute:
Possibility of having an Accusative of General Reference is:

t Awkward translation. If there is an awkward translation:
t Look for two things, noun or pronoun in the accusative case and an infinitive.
1. Deciding which of these terms is supplied depends on the tense of the main verb and the tense of the participle in the
Genitive. Context makes this an easy decision.
110 LESSON 10
t When translating, turn the noun or pronoun into a nominative and the infinitive
into a verb for the new nominative.
Hebrews 5:12 πάλιν χρείαν ἔχετε τοῦ διδάσκειν ὑμᾶς τινά.
t Recognize an awkward translation: Still you have need to teach you someone
t You still have a need for someone to teach you / You still have need that someone
teaches you.
t Mark 14:30 πρὶν ἢ δὶς ἀλέκτορα φωνῆσαι τρίς με ἀπαρνήσῃ. Before the
cock crows twice you will deny me three times.
PART THREE: Conditional Sentences

Conditional sentences are those that begin with “if ” in English, and immediately point to
a condition. [See Appendix H for many examples.]
t The “if ” clause is called the protasis (Greek: “stands before,” from προ and ἳστημι)
and the “results” clause is called the apodosis (Greek: ἀπόδοσις=to give back, see
ἀποδίδωμι).
t If this, then this=the two parts of the conditional sentence.
The Key to Working with Conditional Sentences:

t Many students find the discussions on conditional sentences confusing because the
terms used for classification seemingly point to the second half of the conditional
clause.
t The four categories of conditional sentences, though, all relate to the first part of
the conditional sentence.
t If you define conditional sentences on the basis of the apodosis, the second clause,
confusion is inevitable, for in each of the four, if the first part is true, it follows that
the conclusion is assumed or inferred.
t This problem is immediately eliminated when we relate the four categories solely
to the first clause, the protasis.
t The question we need to answer is related to the certainty or lack thereof of the
viability of the first part of the conditional sentence. The “iffyness of the if.”
Basic Syntax 111
The Four Types of Conditional Sentences.
Assumed Fulfilled2
This condition is assumed “fulfilled” for purposes of discussion, either by the speaker or the
one being spoken to. The “if ” could be translated in some cases “since” if the “assumed”
condition is from the speaker’s point of view. If the “if ” applies to the listener’s point of view
the “if ” could be translated: “for the sake of argument, let us assume …” Grammatically
this construction uses εἰ plus the indicative mode in the protasis in any tense.
t John 11: 12 εἰ κεκοίμηται, σωθήσεται. If (since)he has fallen asleep, he will
be cured.
t Matt. 12:27 καὶ εἰ ἐγὼ ἐν Βεελζεβοὺλ ἐκβάλλω τὰ δαιμόνια, οἱ υἱοὶ
ὑμῶν ἐν τίνι ἐκβάλλουσιν. If (as you say / for the sake of argument) I cast out
demons by Beelzebul, by whom do your sons cast them out?
t Gal. 5:25 εἰ ζῶμεν πνεύματι, πνεύματι καὶ στοιχῶμεν. If (since) we live
by the Spirit, let us also walk by the Spirit.
t Luke 4:3 Εἰ υἱὸς εἶ τοῦ θεοῦ, εἰπὲ τῷ λίθῳ τούτῳ ἵνα γένηται ἄρτος. If
(since / as it is believed) you are the Son of God, command this stone to become
bread.
Probable3
The speaker in this condition considers that the condition stated in the protasis has the
possibility (or even probability) of becoming a reality. Grammatically, the writer uses
ἐάν or ἄν and the subjunctive mode in the protasis.
t John 8:51 ἀμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ἐάν τις τὸν ἐμὸν λόγον τηρήσῃ,
θάνατον οὐ μὴ θεωρήσῃ εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα. “Very truly, I tell you, whoever [if
someone] keeps my word [he] will never see death.” = Jesus is saying that probably
there are some who will keep his word.
Impossible4
The speaker assumes that the condition in the protasis is impossible. The apodosis states
what would have been true in the event that the protasis had been true.
2. Sometimes called the “First Class Conditional” sentence.

3. Sometimes called the “Third Class Conditional” sentence.
4. Sometimes called the “Second Class Conditional” sentence, the condition that is “contrary to fact.”
112 LESSON 10
Grammatically, in the protasis of this condition, εἰ is used always with a past tense in
the indicative mode. The apodosis has a past tense of the indicative mode and usually
ἄν—it is too late to come true.
t Matt. 23:30 Εἰ ἤμεθα ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, οὐκ ἂν
ἤμεθα αὐτῶν κοινωνοὶ ἐν τῷ αἵματι τῶν προφητῶν. “If we had lived in
the days of our ancestors, we would not have taken part with them in shedding the
blood of the prophets.”
t John 5:46 εἰ γὰρ ἐπιστεύετε Μωϋσεῖ, ἐπιστεύετε ἂν ἐμοί· περὶ γὰρ
ἐμοῦ ἐκεῖνος ἔγραψεν. “If you believed Moses, you would believe me, for he
wrote about me.”
t John 14:28 εἰ ἠγαπᾶτέ με ἐχάρητε ἄν ὅτι πορεύομαι πρὸς τὸν πατέρα,
ὅτι ὁ πατὴρ μείζων μού ἐστιν. “If you loved me, you would rejoice that I am
going to the Father, because the Father is greater than I.”
Remotely Possible
This condition implies that the possibility of the “if ” clause ever occurring is very remote.
Grammatically, this construction involves the use of εἰ with the optative in the protasis,
ἄν with the optative in the apodosis.
[The optative mode is the fourth mode mentioned previously that occurs just 68 times in
the NT. Its most prominent feature is the use of “οι” in the verb ending.]
t I Peter 3:14 εἰ και πάσχοιτε διὰ δικαιοσύνην, μακάριοι. “Even if you
should suffer because of righteousness, (you would be) blessed.”
t I Cor. 14:10 τοσαῦτα εἰ τύχοι γένη φωνῶν εἰσιν ἐν κόσμῳ. “If it should
happen to be (this way), there are so many kinds of sounds in the world.”
PART FOUR: Exercises (taken from Appendix H)
Genitive Absolute [From the Gospel of Matthew with Accusatives of General

Reference underscored by double lines]
1:18 Τοῦ δὲ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ ἡ γένεσις οὕτως ἦν. μνηστευθείσης τῆς
μητρὸς αὐτοῦ Μαρίας τῷ Ἰωσήφ, πρὶν ἢ συνελθεῖν αὐτοὺς εὑρέθη ἐν
γαστρὶ ἔχουσα ἐκ πνεύματος ἁγίου.
Basic Syntax 113
1:20 ταῦτα δὲ αὐτοῦ ἐνθυμηθέντος ἰδοὺ ἄγγελος κυρίου κατ᾿ ὄναρ ἐφάνη
αὐτῷ…
2:1 Τοῦ δὲ Ἰησοῦ γεννηθέντος ἐν Βηθλέεμ τῆς Ἰουδαίας ἐν ἡμέραις

Ἡρῴδου τοῦ βασιλέως,
Accusative of General Reference [From the Gospel of Luke]

2:27 καὶ ἦλθεν ἐν τῷ πνεύματι εἰς τὸ ἱερόν· καὶ ἐν τῷ εἰσαγαγεῖν τοὺς γονεῖς
τὸ παιδίον Ἰησοῦν τοῦ ποιῆσαι αὐτοὺς κατὰ τὸ εἰθισμένον τοῦ νόμου περὶ
αὐτοῦ
3:21 Ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν τῷ βαπτισθῆναι ἅπαντα τὸν λαὸν καὶ Ἰησοῦ βαπτισθέντος
καὶ προσευχομένου ἀνεῳχθῆναι τὸν οὐρανὸν 22 καὶ καταβῆναι τὸ πνεῦμα
τὸ ἅγιον σωματικῷ εἴδει ὡς περιστερὰν ἐπ᾿ αὐτόν, καὶ φωνὴν ἐξ οὐρανοῦ
γενέσθαι, Σὺ εἶ ὁ υἱός μου ὁ ἀγαπητός, ἐν σοὶ εὐδόκησα.
4:41 ἐξήρχετο δὲ καὶ δαιμόνια ἀπὸ πολλῶν κρ[αυγ]άζοντα καὶ λέγοντα ὅτι
Σὺ εἶ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ. καὶ ἐπιτιμῶν οὐκ εἴα αὐτὰ λαλεῖν, ὅτι ᾔδεισαν τὸν
Χριστὸν αὐτὸν εἶναι.
Conditional Sentences [From the Gospel of Matthew]

5:46 ἐὰν γὰρ ἀγαπήσητε τοὺς ἀγαπῶντας ὑμᾶς, τίνα μισθὸν ἔχετε; οὐχὶ καὶ
οἱ τελῶναι τὸ αὐτὸ ποιοῦσιν;
23:30 καὶ λέγετε· εἰ ἤμεθα ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, οὐκ ἂν ἤμεθα
αὐτῶν κοινωνοὶ ἐν τῷ αἵματι τῶν προφητῶν.
11:23 καὶ σύ, Καφαρναούμ, μὴ ἕως οὐρανοῦ ὑψωθήσῃ; ἕως ᾅδου καταβήσῃ·
ὅτι εἰ ἐν Σοδόμοις ἐγενήθησαν αἱ δυνάμεις αἱ γενόμεναι ἐν σοί, ἔμεινεν ἂν
μέχρι τῆς σήμερον.
26:33 ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ Πέτρος εἶπεν αὐτῷ· εἰ πάντες σκανδαλισθήσονται ἐν
σοί, ἐγὼ οὐδέποτε σκανδαλισθήσομαι.
24:23 Τότε ἐάν τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ· ἰδοὺ ὧδε ὁ χριστός, ἤ· ὧδε, μὴ πιστεύσητε
4:3 καὶ προσελθὼν ὁ πειράζων εἶπεν αὐτῷ· εἰ υἱὸς εἶ τοῦ θεοῦ, εἰπὲ ἵνα οἱ
λίθοι οὗτοι ἄρτοι γένωνται.
114 LESSON 10
12:26 καὶ εἰ ὁ σατανᾶς τὸν σατανᾶν ἐκβάλλει, ἐφ᾿ ἑαυτὸν ἐμερίσθη· πῶς
οὖν σταθήσεται ἡ βασιλεία αὐτοῦ;
5:19 ὃς ἐὰν οὖν λύσῃ μίαν τῶν ἐντολῶν τούτων τῶν ἐλαχίστων καὶ
διδάξῃ οὕτως τοὺς ἀνθρώπους, ἐλάχιστος κληθήσεται ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ τῶν
οὐρανῶν
22:45 εἰ οὖν Δαυὶδ καλεῖ αὐτὸν κύριον, πῶς υἱὸς αὐτοῦ ἐστιν;
For many examples of all three of the syntax contructions above, go to Appendix H
There is also one example of the “remotely possible” condition.
Did You Know ...

That around the end of the 19th century, a remarkable discovery
was made in Egypt, the finding of the Oxyrhynchus Papyri? From
these manuscripts it became clear that the Koine Greek, the Greek
of the New Testament, was not a formal Greek, but the Greek
used by ordinary people in ordinary conversation. This gave rise
to the many modern speech translations done in the 20th century:
Weymouth, Moffatt, Goodspeed, and Phillips, to name some. An
example of the modern speech approach is where Phillips takes the
words of Paul “greet one another with a holy kiss” to read “a hearty
handshake all around.”
Suggested Study Guide 115
APPENDIX A
Suggested Study Guide
The schedule given here covers the ten lessons in one semester. The ten lessons may be structured
in many ways: (1) two lessons per week; (2) one lesson per week; (3) the ten lessons divided over
six months, etc. If learning outside a classroom setting, establish a schedule in advance and stick
to it!
Lesson 1: The Greek Language

Day 1
t Brief history of Koine Greek and its importance
t Learn Greek alphabet
t Pronunciation practice
Lesson 2: Review of Grammar

Day 2
t English grammar review
t Greek grammar terms
t Continue pronunciation practice
Lesson 3: Minimum One

Days 3 and 4
t Learn Vocabulary 3–a and b
t Learn Minimum One (Endings of the First and Second Declensions, using
ἀγαθός for the pattern)
t Practice sentences
Day 5
t Review from beginning
116 Appendix A
Lesson 4: Minimum Two

Days 6 and 7
t Learn vocabulary 4–a and b
t Learn Minimum Two (Endings of the Third Declension)
t Exercises
Lesson 5: Minimum Three

Days 8, 9 and 10
t Learn vocabulary 5–a
t Learn Minimum Three (The Four Basic Verb Endings)
t Work on sentences
t Learn vocabulary 5–b
t Work on 1 John 1
t The “copycat” 2 aorist
t Work on exercises
Day 11
t Review all words from the beginning through Lesson 5 and Minimums One
through Three
Lesson 6: Minimums Four and Five

Day 12
t Learn Minimum Four (The Tense Identifiers) and vocabulary 6–a
t Begin 1 John 2
Day 13
t Learn Minimum Five (Applying Four to Three) and vocabulary 6–b
t Learn vocabulary 6–c
Suggested Study Guide 117
t Study Contract verbs
t Read 1 John 2:1–20
Lesson 7: Minimum Six

Days 14 and 15
t Study 1 John 2:21–29
t Translation practice
t Translation practice
Day 16
t Learn vocabulary 7–c
t Learn Minimum Six–A (Participles in Active Voice)
t Translation / Review Minimums
t Application of Tense Identifiers to the participle of εἰμί
t Prepare John 3:1–5
Day 17
t Review application steps for Minimum Six-A and work on John 3:1–5
Days 18 and 19
t Learn vocabulary 7–d
t Learn Minimum Six-B (Middle/Passive Participle)
t Practice applications
t Middle/Passive Participle in all tenses
t Work on John 3:6–10
118 Appendix A
Lesson 8: Minimum Seven

Day 20
t Learn Minimum Seven–A (The Subjunctive Mode)
Days 21 and 22
t Learn Minimum Seven–B (The Imperative Mode)
Day 23
t Review all vocabulary and all Minimums
Lesson 9: Minimum Eight

Day 24
t Learn Minimum Eight, the key features of the –μι verb.
t Prepare John 3: 26–30
Lesson 10: Basic Syntax

Days 25 and 26
t The Genitive Absolute
t The Accusative of General Reference
t Conditional Sentences.
Days 27 and 28
t Syntax examples and practice (Appendix G)
Key to Exercises 119
APPENDIX B
Key to Exercises
Lesson 3: Part One

1. For/with/to the angels in the world
2. The men of Galilee
3. The good word
4. I see the good apostles; they are speaking in/with the good voice.
5. The glory of God
6. Another prophet of glory
7. I have the words of life for the men of the world.
8. I (myself ) see the Christ of glory.
9. And now the kingdom of God has come to the world. Amen.
10. It is good.
11. I (myself ) speak/am speaking to Peter.
12. The prophets of God are speaking the words of the heart in/with the good voice to the men
of the world.
13. The angel himself is good; the angels themselves are good.
14. The good angel himself.
15. The good apostle is speaking in/at the good time/season.
16. The good prophets are speaking to the evil/bad men.
Lesson 3: Part Two

1. To/for/with the works of men
2. These good prophets of the kingdom
3. In/with the Word of God and not in the heart of another angel
120 Appendix B
4. Now I speak the words of life to the good prophets in the world.
5. I have the gospel for them.
6. The love of God
7. The power/authority of the Lord
8. I (myself ) see Christ in heaven and in the world.
9. This work is good / This is a good work.
10. Sin is not in heaven.
11. For I do not speak the words of sin; now I see God.
12. God is love.
13. Jesus is Lord and Christ.
14. The kingdom of glory and heaven.
Lesson 4: Part One

1. For/to/with the sons of all mankind/men
2. The love of God and the faithfulness/faith of Christ and the will of the Spirit
3. In/with the water of life, concerning the power of God
4. Jesus is the light of the world.
5. The grace of Christ out of/from his faithfulness
6. I seek the son of man so that his love may speak to me.
7. This is the man of faith.
8. The words out of his mouth
9. His hope is in the water and in the blood, but not in the evil spirit.
10. The grace of God is for/to/in all.
11. I (myself ) speak all the words of grace and of faith(fulness) for/to the men.
12. In heaven and in the world, Jesus is Lord.
13. Out of the night and through the day, I have the kingdom of hope.
14. I know the will of God and I speak to him day and night.
Lesson 4: Part Two

1. Who is this man?
2. In the body, in the heart concerning/about flesh
3. To/for the father and for all the sons and in the good work
4. The evil king is in the evil city but not in the city of light.
5. You (yourself ) are the son of someone, but I do not know your name.
6. The evil [one] of this age is of the flesh and not of the spirit.
7. Man is of woman, but woman is also of man.
8. This is Mary, the mother of Jesus, the Son of God.
9. And even the time of the Gentiles/nations is the time of hope.
10. Because the hour has come, I seek the hand of the Lord.
11. Believe in the name of Jesus now, and you (yourself ) shall be saved.
12. In the blood and in the name of Jesus, I (myself ) call in/for the power of God.
13. Jesus is washing the feet of Judas.
14. The scribes and Pharisees and the chief priests are saying that Jesus is not the Lord.
15. The mountains of God
Lesson 4: Part Three

1. I see the glory of the angels of God, and now I have the good hope of life.
2. I am speaking to another man about this word and not about every (any) word.
3. I am seeking the grace of the Lord. The chief priest is not the king.
4. Is it not the time of the prophet and the apostle?
Lesson 5: Part One

1. Who hears (is hearing) this man?
122 Appendix B
2. We see (are seeing) him in the body.

3. The prophets were seeing him in the body.
4. The angels are speaking to the father and were speaking to all the children.
5. The evil king was remaining in the evil city and he does not know the city of light.
6. We (with emphasis) were knowing the father.
7. I (with emphasis) was speaking about the evil world and not about the world of the spirit
(spirit world).
8. We were being seen / We were seeing ourselves (as in a mirror).
9. You were knowing the sons of all men/mankind.
10. You were (being) known from (the) beginning. The word is being heard in the world.
11. The words are being heard in heaven.
12. The words were remaining in the prophet’s heart.
13. We know (with emphasis on “we”) God and God knows the sons (children) of men.
14. The grace of Christ is being spoken by the sea.
15. From hope and in hope, we remain (are remaining) with God.
16. In the hour of grace, the power of God is (being) known.
17. I walk in the truth in order that I may see God.
18. Because God is faithful, thus he is also love and there is no evil out of his mouth.
Lesson 7: Part One

1. They ate the bread which the Lord was sending to them.
2. We are eating / we eat; we ate; we were eating
3. He, it, she is becoming / becomes; he, it, she was becoming; he, it, she became / it came to
pass / it occurred
4. I was throwing / they were throwing; I threw / they threw; I am throwing / throw
5. I saw / they saw; I am seeing / I see; I was seeing / they were seeing
Lesson 7: Part Two
1. The one who loves (he who loves) the ones who believe his commandments is God / God
is the one who loves those who believe his commandments.
2. The ones going down are not the ones going up, because they are evil.
3. Jesus says and was saying and said to the one who sees the light: you are my disciple.
Lesson 7: Part Three

1. The one who loves (he who loves) the ones having believed and having done his
commandments is God / God is the one who loves the ones who have believed and have
done his commandments.
2. The one who teaches the truth is not from the evil one (is not from evil), because he is the
prophet of the Lord.
3. Having answered, Jesus was teaching (in) parables to them.
4. To the one teaching; to the one having taught; to the one having followed
5. Then Jesus was saying to the ones who have believed (and still are)
6. Jesus said to the one having seen the light, you are my disciple.
7. If in this life only, we have hope in Christ, we are the most pitiable of all mankind.
8. And king Herod, having heard and having sent them to Bethlehem, he said, having
proceeded ...
124 Appendix C
APPENDIX C
Supplementary Exercises in Koine Greek
From the Greek Old Testament

Isaiah 61:1-3
1 πνεῦμα κυρίου ἐπ᾽ ἐμέ οὗ εἵνεκεν ἔχρισέν με εὐαγγελίσασθαι πτωχοῖς

ἀπέσταλκέν με ἰάσασθαι τοὺς συντετριμμένους τῇ καρδίᾳ κηρύξαι
αἰχμαλώτοις ἄφεσιν καὶ τυφλοῖς ἀνάβλεψιν 2 καλέσαι ἐνιαυτὸν κυρίου
δεκτὸν καὶ ἡμέραν ἀνταποδόσεως παρακαλέσαι πάντας τοὺς πενθοῦντας
3 δοθῆναι τοῖς πενθοῦσιν Σιων δόξαν ἀντὶ σποδοῦ ἄλειμμα εὐφροσύνης τοῖς
πενθοῦσιν καταστολὴν δόξης ἀντὶ πνεύματος ἀκηδίας καὶ κληθήσονται
γενεαὶ δικαιοσύνης φύτευμα κυρίου εἰς δόξαν
The spirit of the Lord GOD is upon me, because the LORD has anointed me; he
has sent me to bring good news to the oppressed, to bind up the brokenhearted,
to proclaim liberty to the captives, and release to the prisoners; 2 to proclaim
the year of the LORD’s favor, and the day of vengeance of our God; to comfort
all who mourn; 3 to provide for those who mourn in Zion-- to give them a
garland instead of ashes, the oil of gladness instead of mourning, the mantle
of praise instead of a faint spirit. They will be called oaks of righteousness, the
planting of the LORD, to display his glory. (NRSV)
From the Apocrypha

Tobit 13:5-8
5 μαστιγώσει ὑμᾶς ἐπὶ ταῖς ἀδικίαις ὑμῶν καὶ πάντας ὑμᾶς ἐλεήσει ἐκ
πάντων τῶν ἐθνῶν ὅπου ἂν διασκορπισθῆτε ἐν αὐτοῖς 6 ἐὰν ἐπιστρέψητε
Supplementary Exercises 125
πρὸς αὐτὸν ἐν ὅλῃ καρδίᾳ ὑμῶν καὶ ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ ψυχῇ ποιῆσαι ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ
ἀλήθειαν τότε ἐπιστρέψει πρὸς ὑμᾶς καὶ οὐ μὴ κρύψῃ τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ
ἀφ᾽ ὑμῶν 7 καὶ θεάσασθε ἃ ποιήσει μεθ᾽ ὑμῶν καὶ ἐξομολογήσασθε αὐτῷ
ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ στόματι ὑμῶν καὶ εὐλογήσατε τὸν κύριον τῆς δικαιοσύνης καὶ
ὑψώσατε τὸν βασιλέα τῶν αἰώνων 8 ἐγὼ ἐν τῇ γῇ τῆς αἰχμαλωσίας μου
ἐξομολογοῦμαι αὐτῷ καὶ δεικνύω τὴν ἰσχὺν καὶ τὴν μεγαλωσύνην αὐτοῦ
ἔθνει ἁμαρτωλῶν ἐπιστρέψατε ἁμαρτωλοί καὶ ποιήσατε δικαιοσύνην
ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ τίς γινώσκει εἰ θελήσει ὑμᾶς καὶ ποιήσει ἐλεημοσύνην
ὑμῖν
5 He will afflict you for your iniquities, but he will again show mercy on all
of you. He will gather you from all the nations among whom you have been
scattered. 6 If you turn to him with all your heart and with all your soul, to do
what is true before him, then he will turn to you and will no longer hide his face
from you. 7 So now see what he has done for you; acknowledge him at the top
of your voice. Bless the Lord of righteousness, and exalt the King of the ages.
8 In the land of my exile I acknowledge him, and show his power and majesty
to a nation of sinners: ‘Turn back, you sinners, and do what is right before him;
perhaps he may look with favor upon you and show you mercy.’ (NRSV)
From Philo, contemporary of Jesus

On Creation III
This passage captures the genius of a Jewish thinker who was trying to win
over Greek intellectuals. The key to translating is to recognize the “accusative
of general reference” in which the word in the accusative case becomes the
subject of the infinitive. Be sure to capture the brilliant line of thinking, even
though flawed by our current methods.
126 Appendix C
3:1 ἓξ δὲ ἡμέραις δημιοθργηθῆωαί φησι τὸν κόσμον, οὐκ ἐπειδὴ προσεδεῖτο

χρόνων μήκους ὁ ποιῶν--ἅμα γὰρ πάντα δρᾶν εἰκὸς θεόν, οὐ προστάττοντα
μόνον ἀλλὰ καὶ διανοούμενον--, ἀλλ’ ἐπειδὴ τοῖς γινομένοις ἔδει τάξεως.
Τάξει δὲ ἀριθμὸς οἰκεῖον, ἀριθμῶν δὲ, φύσεως νόμοις, γεννητικώτατος ὁ
ἕξ τῶν τε γὰρ ἀπὸ μονάδος πρῶτος τέλειός ἐστιν, ἰσούμενος τοῖς ἑαυτοῦ
μέρεσι καὶ συμπληρούμενος ἐξ αὐτῶν, ἡμίσους μὲν τριάδος, τρίτου δὲ
δυάδος, ἕκτου δὲ μονάδος, καὶ ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν ἄρρην τε καὶ θῆλυς εῖναι
πέφυκε, κἀκ τῆς ἑκατέρου δυνάμεως ἥρμοσται ἄρρεν μὲν γὰρ ἐι τοῖς οὖσι
τὸ περιττόν, τὸ δ’ ἄρτιον θῆλυ περιττών μὲν οὖν ἀριθμῶν ἀρχή τριάς, δυὰς
δ’ ἀρτίων, ἡ δ’ ἀμφοῖν δύναμις ἑξάς. ἔδει γὰρ τὸν κόσμον, τελειότατον μὲν
ὄντα τῶν γεγονότων, κατ’ ἀριθμὸι τέλειον παγῆναι τὸν ἕξ.
ΙΙΙ. He says that in six days the world was created, not that its Maker required
a length of time for His work, for we must think of God as doing all things
simultaneously, remembering that “all” includes with the commands which He
issues the thought behind them. Six days are mentioned because for the things
coming into existence there was the need of order. Order involves number, and
among numbers by the laws of nature the most suitable to productivity is 6,
for if we start with 1 it is the first perfect number, being equal to the product
of its factors (i.e. 1 X 2 X 3), as well as made up of the sum of them (i.e. 1 + 2 +
3), its half being 3, its third part 2, its sixth part 1.a We may say that it is in its
nature both male and female, and is a result of the distinctive power of either.
For among things that are it is the odd that is male, and the even female. Now
of odd numbers 3 is the starting-point, and of even numbers 2, and the product
of these two is 6. For it was requisite that the world, being most perfect of all
things that have come into existence, should be constituted in accordance with
a perfect number, namely six.
Supplementary Exercises 127
Early Christian Fathers
Didache IX.7-12
7. Καὶ πάντα προφήτην λαλοῦντα ἐν πνεύματι οὐ πειράσετε οὐδὲ διακρινεῖτε

πᾶσα γάρ ἁμαρτία ἀφεθήσεται, αὕτη δὲ ἡ ἁμαρτία οὐκ ἀφεθήσεται. 8. οὐ πᾶς
δὲ λαλῶν ἐν πνεύματι προφήτης ἐστίν, ἀλλ’ ἐὰν ἔχῃ τοὺς τρόπους κυρίου.
ἀπὸ οὖν τῶν τρόπων γνωσθήσεται ὁ ψευδοπροφήτης καὶ ὁ προφήτης. 9.
Καὶ πᾶς προφήτης ὁρίζων τράπεζαν ἐν πνεύματι οὐ φάγεται ἀπ’ αὐτῆς,
εἰ δὲ μήγε ψευδοπροφήτης ἐστί. 10. πᾶς δὲ προφήτης διδάσκων τὴν
ἀλήθειαν, εἰ ἃ διδάσκει οὐ ποιεῖ, ψευδοπροφήτης ἐστί. 11. πᾶς δὲ προφήτης
δεδοκιμασμενός, ἀληθινός, ποιῶν εἰς μυστήριον κοσμικὸν ἐκκλησίας, μὴ
διδάσκων δὲ ποιεῖν, ὅσα αὐτὸς ποιεῖ, οὐ κριθήσεται ἐφ’ ὑμῶν: μετὰ θεοῦ
γὰρ ἔχει τὴν κρίσιν: ὡσαύτως γὰρ ἐποίησαν καὶ οἰ ἀρχαῖοι προφῆται. 12. ὃς
δ’ ἂν εἴπῃ ἐν πνεύματι: δός μοι ἀργύρια ἤ ἕτερά τινα, οὐκ ἀκούσεσθε αὐτοῦ:
ἐὰν δὲ περὶ ἄλλων ὑστερούντων εἴπῃ δοῦναι, μηδεὶς αὐτόν κρινέτω.
The colon in verses 11 and 12 represents the raised period in the Greek
manuscripts, probably the equivalent of our semi-colon (which cannot be
used here because it is the “question mark” in Greek texts).
7. Do not test or examine any prophet who is speaking in a spirit, “for every
sin shall be forgiven, but this sin shall not be forgiven.” 8. But not everyone
who speaks in a spirit is a prophet, except he have the behavior of the Lord.
From his behavior, the false prophet and the true prophet shall be known. 9.
And no prophet who orders a meal in a spirit shall eat of it: otherwise he is
a false prophet. 10. And every prophet who teaches the truth, if he do not
what he teaches, is a false prophet. 11. But no prophet who has been tried
and is genuine, though he enact a worldly mystery of the Church, if he teach
not others to do what he does himself, shall be judged by you: for he has his
128 Appendix C
judgment with God, for so also did the prophets of old. 12. But whosoever
shall say in a spirit “Give me money, or something else,” you shall not listen to
him; but if he tell you to give on behalf of others in want, let none judge him.
(LCL)
First Clement XX.1-6
1. ταῦτα δὲ πάντα βεβαιοῖ ἡ ἐν Χριστῷ πίστις καὶ γὰρ αὺτὸς διὰ τοῦ
πνεύματος τοῦ ἁγίου οὕτως προσκαλεῖται ἡμᾶς. Δεῦτε, τέκνα, ἀκούσατέ
μου, φόβον κυρίου διδάξς ὑμᾶς. 2. Τίς ἐστιν ἄνθρωπος ὁ θέλων ζωήν,
ἀγαπῶν ἡμέρας ἰδεῖν ἀγαθάς; 3. παῦσον τὴν γλῶσσάν σου ἀπὸ κακοῦ,
καὶ χείλη σου τοῦ μὴ λαλῆσαι δόλον. 4. ἔκκλινον ἀπὸ κακοῦ, καὶ ποίησον
ἀγαθόν. 5. ζήτησον εἰρήνην, καὶ δίωξον αὐτήν. 6. ὀφθαλμοὶ κυρίου ἐπὶ
δικαίους, καὶ ὦτα αὐτοῦ πρὸς δέησιν αὐτῶν: πρόσωπον δὲ κυρίου ἐπὶ
ποιοῦντας κακά, τοῦ ἐξολεθρεῦσαι ἐκ γῆς τὸ μνημόσυνον αὐτῶν.
1. Now the faith which is in Christ confirms all these things, for he himself
through his Holy Spirit calls us thus: “Come, Children, listen to me, I will teach
you the fear of the Lord. 2. Who is the man that desires life, that loves to see
good days? 3. Make your tongue cease from evil, and your lips that they speak
no guile. 4. Depart from evil, and do good. 5. See peace, and pursue it. 6. The
eyes of the Lord are upon the righteous, and his ears are open to their petition;
but the face of the Lord is against those that do evil, to destroy the memory of
them from off the earth. 7. The righteous cried, and the Lord heard him, and
delivered him out of his afflictions. 8. Many are the scourges of the sinner, but
mercy shall encompass those that hope on the Lord.”
Pronoun Declensions 129
APPENDIX D
Pronoun Declensions
[For the declension of nouns, adjectives, and participles, see Minimums One, Two and Six]
First and Second Declension Pronouns
All first and second declension pronouns have the endings αγαθος The neuter form,
however, (αγαθον) drops the final ν. See Minimum One.
1. Personal Pronouns
FIRST PERSON (ἐγώ, I / we)
SINGULAR PLURAL
Nom ἐγώ ἡμεῖς
Gen ἐμοῦ ( μου) ἡμῶν
Dat ἐμοί ( μοι) ἡμῖν
Acc ἐμέ ( με) ἡμᾶς
Observations for the singular:

t The nominative is already learned (our word “ego”)
t The genitive, compare the genitive of ἀγαθός--ἀγαθou
t The dative, the final iota is the same as the dative of the third declension (and also of the
first and second declensions, although it is subscripted in the latter two)
t The accusative is the same as English: me.
Observations for the plural:
t The nominative is already learned from the vocabulary requirement
t The genitive has the same final two letters as all genders of all declensions in the genitive
plural
t The dative (the iota helps as it is in the dative singular and plural)
t The accusative’s final two letters are the same as the accusative plural of the first and third
declensions.
130 Appendix D
SECOND PERSON (σύ, you)

SINGULAR PLURAL
Nom σύ ὑμεῖς
Gen σοῦ ὑμῶν
Dat σοί ὑμῖν
Acc σἐ ὑμᾶς
Observations:
t these forms are the same as the “first person” except for the first letter.
t the plural is easy to learn because the form begins with a υ=“You.”
THIRD PERSON (αὐτός,- ό, -ή he, it, she)

SINGULAR
Nom. αὐτός αὐτό αὐτή
Gen. αὐτοῦ αὐτοῦ αὐτῆς
Dat. αὐτῷ αὐτῷ αὐτῇ
Acc. αὐτόν αὐτό αὐτήν
PLURAL
Nom. αὐτοί αὐτά αὐταί
Gen. αὐτῶν αὐτῶν αὐτῶν
Dat. αὐτοῖς αὐτοῖς αὐταῖς
Acc. αὐτούς αὐτά αὐτάς
2. Demonstrative Pronouns [Near]

Observe that the masculine and feminine nominatives (singular and plural) have a rough
breather and all other forms begin with a “τ.”
SINGULAR
Nom. οὗτος τοῦτο αὕτη
Gen. τούτου τούτου ταύτης
Dat. τούτῳ τούτῳ ταύτῃ
Acc. τοῦτοv τοῦτο ταύτην
PLURAL
Nom. οὗτοι ταῦτα αὗται
Gen. τούτων τούτων τούτων
Dat. τούτοις τούτοις ταύταις
Acc. τούτους ταῦτα ταύτας
3. Demonstrative Pronouns [Far]

SINGULAR
Nom. ἐκεῖνος ἐκεῖνο ἐκείνη
Gen. ἐκείνου ἐκείνου ἐκείνης
Dat. ἐκείνῳ ἐκείνῳ ἐκείνῃ
Acc. ἐκεῖνον ἐκεῖνο ἐκείνην
PLURAL
Nom. ἐκεῖνοι ἐκεῖνα ἐκεῖναι
Gen. ἐκείνων ἐκείνων ἐκείνων
Dat. ἐκείνοις ἐκείνοις ἐκείναις
Acc. ἐκείνους ἐκεῖνα ἐκείνας
4. Relative Pronouns
**When the definition differs, the neuter gender definition is placed in [brackets]
ὅς,[-ὅ], -ἥ, , who, [which]
SINGULAR
Nom. ὅς ὅ ἥ
Gen. οὗ οὗ ἧς
Dat. ᾧ ᾧ ᾗ
Acc. ὅν ὅ ἥν
PLURAL
Nom. οἵ ἅ αἵ
Gen. ὧν ὧν ὧν
Dat. οἷς οἷς αἷς
Acc. οὕς ἅ ἇς
132 Appendix D
5. Reflexive Pronouns
FIRST PERSON (ἐμαυτοῦ, ῆς, of myself )
MASCULINE FEMININE
SINGULAR
Gen. ἐμαυτοῦ ἐμαυτῆς
Dat. ἐμαυτῷ ἐμαυτῇ
Acc. ἐμαυτόν ἐμαυτήν
PLURAL
Gen. ἑαυτῶν ἑαυτῶν
Dat. ἑαυτοῖς ἑαυταῖς
Acc. ἑαυτούς ἑαυτάς
SECOND PERSON (σεαυτοῦ, ῆς, of yourself )

MASCULINE FEMININE
SINGULAR
Gen. σεαυτοῦ σεαυτῆς
Dat. σεαυτῷ σεαυτῇ
Acc. σεαυτόν σεαυτήν
PLURAL
Gen. ἑαυτῶν ἑαυτῶν
Dat. ἑαυτοῖς ἑαυταῖς
Acc. ἑαυτούς ἑαυτάς
THIRD PERSON (ἑαυτοῦ, οῦ, -ῆς of himself, of itself, of herself )

SINGULAR
Gen. ἑαυτοῦ ἑαυτοῦ ἑαυτῆς
Dat. ἑαυτῷ ἑαυτῷ ἑαυτῇ
Acc. ἑαυτόν ἑαυτό ἑαυτήν
PLURAL
Gen. ἑαυτῶν ἑαυτῶν ἑαυτῶν
Dat. ἑαυτοῖς ἑαυτοῖς ἑαυταῖς
Acc. ἑαυτούς ἑαυτά ἑαυτάς
Third Declension Pronouns
The Interrogative and Indefinite pronouns are declined exactly the same. The difference
lies in the fact that the Interrogative pronoun never loses its accent and the clause will end
with a Greek question mark, our semi-colon.
6. Interrogative Pronouns
τίς, [τί], who? which? [what?]
MASC./FEM. NEUTER
SINGULAR
Nom. τίς τί
Gen. τίνος τίνος
Dat. τίνι τίνι
Acc. τίνα τί
PLURAL
Nom. τίνες τίνα
Gen. τίνων τίνων
Dat. τίσι(ν) τίσι(ν)
Acc. τίνας τίνα
7. Indefinite Pronouns
τις, [τι], someone, [something]
MASC./FEM. NEUTER
SINGULAR
Nom. τις τι
Gen. τινός τινός
Dat. τινί τινί
Acc. τινά τι
PLURAL
Nom. τινές τινά
Gen. τινῶν τινῶν
Dat. τισί(ν) τισί(ν)
Acc. τινάς τινά
134 Appendix E
APPENDIX E
Adjectives
[μέγας follows the first and second declensions except in the comparative degree
where it follows the third declension]
μέγας, μέγα, μεγάλη, great

[Occurs 243 times in the NT along with the comparative, given next]
SINGULAR
Nom. μέγας μέγα μεγάλη
Gen. μεγάλου μεγάλου μεγάλης
Dat. μεγάλῳ μεγάλῳ μεγάλῃ
Acc. μέγαν μέγα μεγάλην
PLURAL
Nom. μεγάλοι μεγάλα μεγάλαι
Gen. μεγάλων μεγάλων μεγάλων
Dat. μεγάλοις μεγάλοις μεγάλαις
Acc. μεγάλους μεγάλα μεγάλας
μεγας in the comparative

MASC./FEM. NEUTER
SINGULAR
Nom. μείζων μεῖζον
Gen. μείζονος μείζονος
Dat. μείζονι μείζονι
Acc. μείζονα ( μείζω) μεῖζον
PLURAL
Nom. μείζονες ( μείζους) μείζονα ( μείζω)
Gen. μειζόνων μειζόνων
Dat. μείζοσι(ν) μείζοσι(ν)
Acc. μείζονας ( μείζους) μείζονα ( μείζω)
Adjectives 135
ἀληθής, ές, true
MASC./FEM. NEUTER
SINGULAR
Nom. ἀληθής ἀληθές
Gen. ἀληθοῦς ἀληθοῦς
Dat. ἀληθεῖ ἀληθεῖ
Acc. ἀληθῆ ἀληθές
Voc. ἀληθές ἀληθές
PLURAL
Nom. ἀληθεῖς ἀληθῆ
Gen. ἀληθῶν ἀληθῶν
Dat. ἀληθέσι(ν) ἀληθέσι(ν)
Acc. ἀληθεῖς ἀληθῆ
πᾶς, πᾶν, πᾶσα, all

SINGULAR
Nom. πᾶς πᾶν πᾶσα
Gen. παντός παντός πάσης
Dat. παντί παντί πάσῃ
Acc. πάντα πᾶν πᾶσαν
PLURAL
Nom. πάντες πάντα πᾶσαι
Gen. πάντων πάντων πασῶν
Dat. πᾶσι(ν) πᾶσι(ν) πάσαις
Acc. πάντας πάντα πάσας
136 Appendix E
πολύς, πολύ, πολλή, much

SINGULAR
Nom. πολύς πολύ πολλή
Gen. πολλοῦ πολλοῦ πολλῆς
Dat. πολλῷ πολλῷ πολλῇ
Acc. πολύν πολύ πολλήν
PLURAL
Nom. πολλοί πολλά πολλαί
Gen. πολλῶν πολλῶν πολλῶν
Dat. πολλοῖς πολλοῖς πολλαῖς
Acc. πολλούς πολλά πολλάς
Conjugations 137
APPENDIX F
Conjugations
[Even though participles are declined, they are included here as traditionally listed]
The Regular Verb
λύω, I loose, stem λυ-

Principal Parts: λύω [I loose], λύσω [I will loose], ἔλυσα [I loosed], λέλυκα [I
have loosed], λέλυμαι [I have been loosed], ἐλύθην [I was loosed]
The Imperfect Tense = Ongoing action in the past, left of the NOW line
[These two tables complete the Imperfect tense of λύω. See below for the Imperfect tense
of the verb “to be.”]
Imperfect Active Indicative of λύω [These are also the endings of the 2 Aorist Active
Indicative]
1 ἔλυον I was loosing
SG 2 ἔλυες you were loosing
3 ἔλυε(ν) he was loosing
1 ἐλύομεν we were loosing

PL 2 ἐλύετε you were loosing
3 ἔλυον they were loosing
Imperfect Middle/Passive Indicative of λύω [These are also the endings of the 2 Aorist
Middle Indicative.
The 2 Aorist passive endings are like the 1 Aorist passive minus the θ; see NOTE at the
end of this table for two notable 2 Aorist passives]
[The translation for the middle voice is given first, followed by the translation of the passive
voice. This procedure is followed throughout.]
138 Appendix F
Imperfect Middle/Passive Indicative

1 ἐλυόμην I was loosing (for) myself, I was being loosed
SG 2 ἐλύου you were loosing for yourself, you were being loosed
3 ἐλύετο he was loosing for himself, he was being loosed
1 ἐλυόμεθα we were loosing for ourselves, we were being loosed

PL 2 ἐλύεσθε you were loosing for yourselves, you were being loosed
3 ἐλύοντο they were loosing for themselves, they were being loosed
Two notable 2 Aorist passives: [Observe the absence of the θ of the 1 Aorist
Passive tense ID]:
Mat. 9:33 καὶ ἐθαύμασαν οἱ ὄχλοι λέγοντες οὐδέποτε ἐφάνη
(φαίνω–I shine [31 times]) οὕτως ἐν τῷ Ἰσραήλ. [And the crowds were
amazed and said, “Never has anything like this been seen in Israel.”]
Mat. 2:10 ἰδόντες δὲ τὸν ἀστέρα ἐχάρησαν (χαίρω – I rejoice, am
glad [74 times]) χαρὰν μεγάλην σφόδρα. [When they saw that the star,
they rejoiced with great joy.]
The Present Tense

Present Active Indicative of λύω
1 λύω I loose (am loosing)
SG 2 λύεις you loose (are loosing)
3 λύει he looses (is loosing)
1 λύομεν we loose (are loosing)

PL 2 λύετε you loose (are loosing)
3 λύουσι(ν) they loose (are loosing)
Conjugations 139
Present Middle/Passive Indicative of λύω
1 λύομαι I loose (am loosing) (for) myself
I am being loosed
SG 2 λύῃ you loose (are loosing) for yourself
you are being loosed
3 λύεται he looses (is loosing) for himself
he is being loosed
1 λυόμεθα we loose (are loosing) for ourselves

we are being loosed
PL 2 λύεσθε you loose (am loosing) for yourselves
you are being loosed
3 λύονται they loose (are loosing) for themselves
they are being loosed
[Subjunctive and Imperative Modes, the emphasis is “ongoing” versus “beginning” of an

action]
Present Active Subjunctive of λύω
1 λύω I may (might) be loosing
SG 2 λύῃς you may (might) be loosing
3 λύῃ in order that he may (might) be loosing
1 λύωμεν we may (might) be loosing

PL 2 λύητε in order that you may (might) be loosing
3 λύωσι(ν) they may (might) be loosing
Present Middle/Passive Subjunctive of λύω

1 λύωμαι I may be loosing (for) myself
I may be loosed
SG 2 λύῃ you may be loosing for yourself
you may be loosed
3 λύηται he may be loosing for himself
he may be loosed
140 Appendix F
1 λυώμεθα we may be loosing (for) ourselves

we may be loosed
let us be loosing for ourselves
let us be loosed
PL 2 λύησθε you may be loosing for yourselves
you may be loosed
3 λύωνται they may be loosing for themselves
they may be loosed
Present Active Imperative of λύω

S 2 λῦε (continue to) loose
3 λυέτω let him loose
Pl 2 λύετε loose
3 λυέτωσαν let them loose
Present Middle/Passive Imperative of λύω

2 λύου (continue to) loose (for) yourself
be loosed
3 λυέσθω let him loose for himself
let him be loosed
Pl 2 λύεσθε loose for yourselves
be loosed
3 λυέσθωσαν let them loose for themselves
let them be loosed
Present Active Infinitive of λύω

λύειν to loose, be loosing
Present Middle/Passive Infinitive of λύω

λύεσθαι to loose (for) one’s self, be loosed
Conjugations 141
Present Active Participle of λύω
λύων, λύουσα, λῦον, loosing
SINGULAR
Nom. λύων λῦον λύουσα
Gen. λύοντος λύοντος λυούσης
Dat. λύοντι λύοντι λυούσῃ
Acc. λύοντα λῦον λύουσαν
PLURAL
Nom. λύοντες λύοντα λύουσαι
Gen. λυόντων λυόντων λυουσῶν
Dat. λύουσι(ν) λύουσι(ν) λυούσαις
Acc. λύοντας λύοντα λυούσας
Present Middle/Passive Participle of λύω
λυόμενος loosing (for) himself

being loosed
λυόμενον
λυομένη
The Future Tense
Future Active Indicative of λύω

1 λύσω I shall loose
SG 2 λύσεις you will loose
3 λύσει he will loose
1 λύσομεν we shall loose
PL 2 λύσετε you will loose
3 λύσουσι(ν) they will loose
142 Appendix F
Future Middle Indicative of λύω

1 λύσομαι I shall loose (for) myself
SG 2 λύσῃ you will loose for yourself
3 λύσεται he will loose for himself
1 λυσόμεθα we shall loose for ourselves
PL 2 λύσεσθε you will loose for yourselves
3 λύσονται they will loose for themselves
Future Passive Indicative of λύω

1 λυθήσομαι I shall be loosed
SG 2 λυθήσῃ you shall be loosed
3 λυθήσεται he shall be loosed
1 λυθησόμεθα we shall be loosed
PL 2 λυθήσεσθε you shall be loosed
3 λυθήσονται they shall be loosed
The Aorist Tense
[Indicative Mode: Point action, simple past, left of the NOW line]
Aorist Active Indicative of λύω
1 ἔλυσα I loosed
SG 2 ἔλυσας you loosed
3 ἔλυσε(ν) he loosed
1 ἐλύσαμεν we loosed
PL 2 ἐλύσατε you loosed
3 ἔλυσαν they loosed
Conjugations 143
Aorist Middle Indicative of λύω
1 ἐλυσάμην I loosed (for) myself
SG 2 ἐλύσω you loosed for yourself
3 ἐλύσατο he loosed for himself
1 ἐλυσάμεθα we loosed for ourselves
PL 2 ἐλύσασθε you loosed for yourselves
3 ἐλύσαντο we loosed for ourselves
Aorist Passive Indicative of λύω

1 ἐλύθην I was loosed
SG 2 ἐλύθης you were loosed
3 ἐλύθη he was loosed
1 ἐλύθημεν we were loosed
PL 2 ἐλύθητε you were loosed
3 ἐλύθησαν they were loosed
[Subjunctive and Imperative Modes, emphasis is on the beginning of the action versus
“ongoing”]
Aorist Active Subjunctive of λύω
1 λύσω I may loose
SG 2 λύσῃς you may loose
3 λύσῃ he may loose
1 λύσωμεν we may loose
let us loose
PL 2 λύσητε you may loose
3 λύσωσι(ν) they may loose
144 Appendix F
Aorist Middle Subjunctive of λύω

1 λύσωμαι I may loose (for) myself
SG 2 λύσῃ you may loose for yourself
3 λύσηται he may loose for himself
1 λυσώμεθα we may loose for ourselves
let us loose for ourselves
PL 2 λύσησθε you may loose for yourselves
3 λύσωνται they may loose for themselves
Aorist Passive Subjunctive of λύω

1 λυθῶ I was loosed
SG 2 λυθῇς you were loosed
3 λυθῇ he was loosed
1 λυθῶμεν we were loosed
PL 2 λυθῆτε you were loosed
3 λυθῶσι(ν) they were loosed
Aorist Active Imperative of λύω

SG 2 λῦσον loose
3 λυσάτω let him loose
PL 2 λύσατε loose
3 λυσάτωσαν let them loose
Aorist Middle Imperative of λύω

S 2 λῦσαι loose (for) yourself
3 λυσάσθω let him loose for himself
Pl 2 λύσασθε loose for yourselves
3 λυσάσθωσαν let them loose for themselves
Aorist Active Infinitive of λύω

λῦσαι to loose
Conjugations 145
Aorist Middle Infinitive of λύω
λύσασθαι to loose (for) oneself
Aorist Active Participle of λύω

λύσας, λῦσαν, λύσασα, having loosed
SINGULAR
Nom. λύσας λῦσαν λύσασα
Gen. λύσαντος λύσαντος λυσάσης
Dat. λύσαντι λύσαντι λυσάσῃ
Acc. λύσαντα λῦσαν λύσασαν
PLURAL
Nom. λύσαντες λύσαντα λύσασαι
Gen. λυσάντων λυσάντων λυσασῶν
Dat. λύσασι(ν) λύσασι(ν) λυσάσαις
Acc. λύσαντας λύσαντα λυσάσας
Aorist Middle Participle of λύω

λυσάμενος having loosed (for) himself
λυσάμενον
λυσαμένη
146 Appendix F
Aorist Passive Participle of λύω

λυθείς, λυθέν, λυθεῖσα, having been loosed
SINGULAR
Nom. λυθείς λυθέν λυθεῖσα
Gen. λυθέντος λυθέντος λυθείσης
Dat. λυθέντι λυθέντι λυθείσῃ
Acc. λυθέντα λυθέν λυθεῖσαν
PLURAL
Nom. λυθέντες λυθέντα λυθεῖσαι
Gen. λυθέντων λυθέντων λυθεισῶν
Dat. λυθεῖσι(ν) λυθεῖσι(ν) λυθείσαις
Acc. λυθέντας λυθέντα λυθείσας
Aorist Passive Imperative of λύω

SG 2 λύθητι be loosed
3 λυθήτω let him be loosed
PL 2 λύθητε be loosed
3 λυθήτωσαν let them be loosed
Aorist Passive Infinitive of λύω

λυθῆναι to be loosed
Conjugations 147
The Perfect Tense
Perfect Active Indicative of λύω

1 λέλυκα I have loosed
SG 2 λέλυκας you have loosed
3 λέλυκε(ν) he has loosed
1 λελύκαμεν we have loosed
PL 2 λελύκατε you have loosed
3 λελύκασι(ν) they have loosed
λέλυκαν
Perfect Active Infinitive of λύω

λελυκέναι to have loosed
Perfect Middle/Passive Indicative of λύω

[Tense ID: No connecting vowel]
1 λέλυμαι I have loosed (for) myself
I have been loosed
SG 2 λέλυσαι you have loosed for yourself
you have been loosed
3 λέλυται he has loosed for himself
he has been loosed
1 λελύμεθα we have loosed for ourselves
we have been loosed
PL 2 λέλυσθε you have loosed for yourselves
you have been loosed
3 λέλυνται they have loosed for themselves
they have been loosed
Perfect Middle/Passive Infinitive of λύω

λελύσθαι to have loosed (for) one’s self
to have been loosed
148 Appendix F
Perfect Active Participle of λύω

λελυκώς, λελυκός λελυκυῖ,
SINGULAR
Nom. λελυκώς λελυκός λελυκυῖα
Gen. λελυκότος λελυκότος λελυκυίας
Dat. λελυκότι λελυκότι λελυκυίᾳ
Acc. λελυκότα λελυκός λελυκυῖαν
PLURAL
Nom. λελυκότες λελυκότα λελυκυῖαι
Gen. λελυκότων λελυκότων λελυκυιῶν
Dat. λελυκόσι(ν) λελυκόσι(ν) λελυκυίαις
Acc. λελυκότας λελυκότα λελυκυίας
Perfect Middle/Passive Participle of λύω

λελυμένος having loosed oneself
λελυμένη having been loosed
λελυμένον
Conjugations 149
The verb “to be”
Present Tense
1 εἰμί I am ἐσμέν we are
SG 2 εἶ you are PL ἐστέ you are
3 ἐστί(ν) he, it, she is εἰσί(ν) they are
εἶναι to be
Imperfect Tense
1 ἤμην I was ἦμεν we were
SG 2 ἦς you were PL ἦτε you were
3 ἦν he, it, she was ἦσαν they were
Future Tense
1 ἔσομαι I shall be ἐσόμεθα we shall be
SG 2 ἔσῃ you shall be PL ἔσεσθε you shall be
3 ἔσται he, it, she shall be ἔσονται they shall be
ἔσεσθαι to be (with Accusative of General Reference)
NOTE: The future tense is merely the Primary Middle/Passive endings with the letters εσ
in front of them (with the connecting vowel deleted in the third person singular).
The Pluperfect.
This tense occurs only in the indicative mode. It differs from the perfect tense in the
following way. In the perfect tense, the completed action of the past continues into the
present, the pluperfect has a completed action in the past with ongoing results, BUT the
linear action in the pluperfect has an end somewhere before the present. In English, this
is represented by “I had” versus “I have.”
t Looking at the diagram in Lesson 5, page 48, depicting the time of the tenses vis–à–vis
“now,” the pluperfect would appear like the perfect except the linear aspect ends before
“now.”
150 Appendix F
t The key to recognizing the pluperfect is twofold: the use of the diphthong in the ending:
ει and the double use of the augment (it is repeated in this tense): Observe these two
characteristics in the sample pluperfect conjugation given here.
t The conjugation given here is built on the Secondary active.
The Pluperfect of λύω in the active voice:1
Pluperfect Active Indicative of λύω [86 occurences of the Pluperfect in the NT]
[Tense ID: -κει and often ει + with an augment—to avoid confusion with the Primary
active, 3rd person singular]
1 (ἐ)λελύκειν I had loosed
SG 2 (ἐ)λελύκεις you had loosed
3 (ἐ)λελύκει he had loosed
1 (ἐ)λελύκειμεν we had loosed
PL 2 (ἐ)λελύκειτε you had loosed
3 (ἐ)λελύκεισαν they had loosed
The pluperfect middle occurs just two times in the NT, and the pluperfect passive just five
times. In these seven places, the middle/passive would simply follow the Secondary middle/
passive (see Minimum Three).
1. Observe that the pluperfect is built on the secondary endings. The imperfect tense endings of Minimum Four: ον ες ε,
singular, and ομεν ετε ον, plural, are altered in the pluperfect where the connecting vowel is changed from the ο or ε to ει.
Frequency 151
APPENDIX G2
Frequencies of Word Occurrences
The numbers given here are not intended to be for any statistical analysis, but rather to give an
impression about the importance or lack of importance for certain forms. For example, observe
the dominance of the present and aorist tenses and, further, the large number of the active voice
occurrences. [For verbs, I did not use the “middle/passive” category.]
Verbs
Indicative Mode [15,628] Active Middle Passive

Present [5,538] 4,583 639 308
Aorist [5,919] 4,412 641 866
Future [1,609] 826 493 290
Perfect [839] 605 29 205
Imperfect [1,682] 1,363 225 93
Pluperfect [86] 79 2 5
Subjunctive Mode [1,863] Active Middle Passive

Present [463] 403 44 16
Aorist [1,393] 967 171 259
Old Perfect [10] οἶδα —10
Imperative Mode [1,648] Active Middle Passive

Present [881] 629 199 51
Aorist [762] 610 77 75
Perfect [5] 3 2
Optative Mode [68] Active Middle Passive

Present [23] 19 4 0
Aorist [45] 21 19 5
2. This information is based on Bible Works, version 6.

152 Appendix G
Participles [6,658] Active Middle Passive

M F N M F N M F N
Present [3,688] 2,228 224 170 521 40 42 231 67 94
Aorist [2,285] 1,474 91 21 245 47 15 313 40 39
Future [13] 9 0 1 0 0 2 0 0 1
Perfect [673] 182 12 30 24 4 0 230 71
118
Infinitives [2,291] Active Middle Passive

Present [996] 262 130 100
Aorist [1,241] 958 112 171
Future [5] 0 5 0
Perfect [49] 38 1 10
Nouns etc.
Nouns [28,523] Masculine Neuter Feminine
13,929 4,758 9,862
Adjectives [8,743] Masculine Neuter Feminine

4,342 2,356 1,731
Pronouns [10,752] Masculine Neuter Feminine

7,303 2,215 1.093
Prepositions [10,931] Genitive Dative Accusative

3,887 3,132 3,906
Syntax Examples 153
APPENDIX H
Syntax Examples for Lesson 10
A. The Genitive Absolute [From the Gospel of Matthew]

[Accusatives of General Reference are underscored by double lines]
1:18 Τοῦ δὲ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ ἡ γένεσις οὕτως ἦν. μνηστευθείσης τῆς

μητρὸς αὐτοῦ Μαρίας τῷ Ἰωσήφ, πρὶν ἢ συνελθεῖν αὐτοὺς εὑρέθη ἐν
γαστρὶ ἔχουσα ἐκ πνεύματος ἁγίου.
1:20 ταῦτα δὲ αὐτοῦ ἐνθυμηθέντος ἰδοὺ ἄγγελος κυρίου κατ᾿ ὄναρ ἐφάνη
αὐτῷ…
2:1 Τοῦ δὲ Ἰησοῦ γεννηθέντος ἐν Βηθλέεμ τῆς Ἰουδαίας ἐν ἡμέραις

Ἡρῴδου τοῦ βασιλέως,
2:13 Ἀναχωρησάντων δὲ αὐτῶν ἰδοὺ ἄγγελος κυρίου φαίνεται κατ᾿ ὄναρ

τῷ Ἰωσὴφ λέγων….
2:19 Τελευτήσαντος δὲ τοῦ Ἡρῴδου ἰδοὺ ἄγγελος κυρίου φαίνεται κατ᾿
ὄναρ τῷ Ἰωσὴφ ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ
5:1 ἰδὼν δὲ τοὺς ὄχλους ἀνέβη εἰς τὸ ὄρος, καὶ καθίσαντος αὐτοῦ προσῆλθαν
αὐτῷ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ·
6:3 σοῦ δὲ ποιοῦντος ἐλεημοσύνην μὴ γνώτω ἡ ἀριστερά σου τί ποιεῖ ἡ
δεξιά σου,
8:1 Καταβάντος δὲ αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ τοῦ ὄρους ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ ὄχλοι
πολλοί.
8:5 Εἰσελθόντος δὲ αὐτοῦ εἰς Καφαρναοὺμ προσῆλθεν αὐτῷ ἑκατόνταρχος
παρακαλῶν αὐτὸν
8:16 Ὀψίας δὲ γενομένης προσήνεγκαν αὐτῷ δαιμονιζομένους πολλούς·
καὶ ἐξέβαλεν τὰ πνεύματα λόγῳ καὶ πάντας τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας
ἐθεράπευσεν,
8:28 Καὶ ἐλθόντος αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸ πέραν εἰς τὴν χώραν τῶν Γαδαρηνῶν
154 Appendix H
ὑπήντησαν αὐτῷ δύο δαιμονιζόμενοι ἐκ τῶν μνημείων ἐξερχόμενοι,

χαλεποὶ λίαν, ὥστε μὴ ἰσχύειν τινὰ παρελθεῖν διὰ τῆς ὁδοῦ ἐκείνης.
9:10 καὶ ἐγένετο αὐτοῦ ἀνακειμένου ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ, καὶ ἰδοὺ πολλοὶ τελῶναι
καὶ ἁμαρτωλοὶ ἐλθόντες συνανέκειντο τῷ Ἰησοῦ καὶ τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ.
9:18 Ταῦτα αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος αὐτοῖς, ἰδοὺ ἄρχων εἷς ἐλθὼν προσεκύνει
αὐτῷ λέγων ὅτι ἡ θυγάτηρ μου ἄρτι ἐτελεύτησεν ἀλλὰ ἐλθὼν ἐπίθες τὴν
χεῖρά σου ἐπ᾿ αὐτήν, καὶ ζήσεται.
9:32 Αὐτῶν δὲ ἐξερχομένων ἰδοὺ προσήνεγκαν αὐτῷ ἄνθρωπον κωφὸν
δαιμονιζόμενον.
9:33 καὶ ἐκβληθέντος τοῦ δαιμονίου ἐλάλησεν ὁ κωφός. καὶ ἐθαύμασαν οἱ
ὄχλοι λέγοντες· οὐδέποτε ἐφάνη οὕτως ἐν τῷ Ἰσραήλ.
11:7 Τούτων δὲ πορευομένων ἤρξατο ὁ Ἰησοῦς λέγειν τοῖς ὄχλοις περὶ

Ἰωάννου…
12:46 Ἔτι αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος τοῖς ὄχλοις ἰδοὺ ἡ μήτηρ καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ
εἱστήκεισαν ἔξω ζητοῦντες αὐτῷ λαλῆσαι.
13:6 ἡλίου δὲ ἀνατείλαντος ἐκαυματίσθη καὶ διὰ τὸ μὴ ἔχειν ῥίζαν

ἐξηράνθη.
13:19 παντὸς ἀκούοντος τὸν λόγον τῆς βασιλείας καὶ μὴ συνιέντος ἔρχεται
ὁ πονηρὸς καὶ ἁρπάζει τὸ ἐσπαρμένον ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ, οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ
παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν σπαρείς.
13:21 γενομένης δὲ θλίψεως ἢ διωγμοῦ διὰ τὸν λόγον εὐθὺς
σκανδαλίζεται.
14:15 Ὀψίας δὲ γενομένης προσῆλθον αὐτῷ οἱ μαθηταὶ λέγοντες· ἔρημός
ἐστιν ὁ τόπος καὶ ἡ ὥρα ἤδη παρῆλθεν· ἀπόλυσον τοὺς ὄχλους….
14:23 καὶ ἀπολύσας τοὺς ὄχλους ἀνέβη εἰς τὸ ὄρος κατ᾿ ἰδίαν προσεύξασθαι.
ὀψίας δὲ γενομένης μόνος ἦν ἐκεῖ.
14:32 καὶ ἀναβάντων αὐτῶν εἰς τὸ πλοῖον ἐκόπασεν ὁ ἄνεμος.
16:2 ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς· [ὀψίας γενομένης λέγετε· εὐδία, πυρράζει
γὰρ ὁ οὐρανός….]·
Syntax Examples 155
17:5 ἔτι αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος ἰδοὺ νεφέλη φωτεινὴ ἐπεσκίασεν αὐτούς, καὶ
ἰδοὺ φωνὴ ἐκ τῆς νεφέλης λέγουσα· οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ υἱός μου ὁ ἀγαπητός, ἐν
ᾧ εὐδόκησα…
17:9 Καὶ καταβαινόντων αὐτῶν ἐκ τοῦ ὄρους ἐνετείλατο αὐτοῖς ὁ Ἰησοῦς
λέγων· μηδενὶ εἴπητε τὸ ὅραμα ἕως οὗ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκ νεκρῶν
ἐγερθῇ.
17:14 Καὶ ἐλθόντων [the disciples] πρὸς τὸν ὄχλον προσῆλθεν αὐτῷ ἄνθρωπος
γονυπετῶν αὐτὸν
17:22 Συστρεφομένων δὲ αὐτῶν ἐν τῇ Γαλιλαίᾳ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Ἰησοῦς…·

17:24 Ἐλθόντων δὲ αὐτῶν εἰς Καφαρναοὺμ προσῆλθον οἱ τὰ δίδραχμα
λαμβάνοντες τῷ Πέτρῳ καὶ εἶπαν· ὁ διδάσκαλος ὑμῶν οὐ τελεῖ [τὰ]
δίδραχμα;
17:26 εἰπόντος [Peter] δέ· ἀπὸ τῶν ἀλλοτρίων, ἔφη αὐτῷ ὁ Ἰησοῦς· ἄρα γε
ἐλεύθεροί εἰσιν οἱ υἱοί.
18:24 ἀρξαμένου δὲ αὐτοῦ συναίρειν προσηνέχθη αὐτῷ εἷς ὀφειλέτης
μυρίων ταλάντων.
18:25 μὴ ἔχοντος δὲ αὐτοῦ ἀποδοῦναι ἐκέλευσεν αὐτὸν ὁ κύριος πραθῆναι

καὶ τὴν γυναῖκα καὶ τὰ τέκνα καὶ πάντα ὅσα ἔχει, καὶ ἀποδοθῆναι.
20:8 ὀψίας δὲ γενομένης λέγει ὁ κύριος τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος τῷ ἐπιτρόπῳ

αὐτοῦ· κάλεσον τοὺς ἐργάτας καὶ ἀπόδος αὐτοῖς τὸν μισθὸν ἀρξάμενος
ἀπὸ τῶν ἐσχάτων ἕως τῶν πρώτων.
20:29 Καὶ ἐκπορευομένων αὐτῶν ἀπὸ Ἰεριχὼ ἠκολούθησεν αὐτῷ ὄχλος

πολύς.
21:10 Καὶ εἰσελθόντος αὐτοῦ εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἐσείσθη πᾶσα ἡ πόλις
λέγουσα· τίς ἐστιν οὗτος;
21:23 Καὶ ἐλθόντος αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν προσῆλθον αὐτῷ διδάσκοντι οἱ

ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι τοῦ λαοῦ λέγοντες· ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα
ποιεῖς;
22:41 Συνηγμένων δὲ τῶν Φαρισαίων ἐπηρώτησεν αὐτοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς

156 Appendix H
24:3 Καθημένου δὲ αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τοῦ ὄρους τῶν ἐλαιῶν προσῆλθον αὐτῷ οἱ
μαθηταὶ κατ᾿ ἰδίαν λέγοντες…
25:5 χρονίζοντος δὲ τοῦ νυμφίου ἐνύσταξαν πᾶσαι καὶ ἐκάθευδον.
25:10 ἀπερχομένων δὲ αὐτῶν ἀγοράσαι ἦλθεν ὁ νυμφίος, καὶ αἱ ἕτοιμοι
εἰσῆλθον μετ᾿ αὐτοῦ εἰς τοὺς γάμους καὶ ἐκλείσθη ἡ θύρα.
26:6 Τοῦ δὲ Ἰησοῦ γενομένου ἐν Βηθανίᾳ ἐν οἰκίᾳ Σίμωνος τοῦ λεπροῦ,
26:20 Οψίας δὲ γενομένης ἀνέκειτο μετὰ τῶν δώδεκα.
26:21 καὶ ἐσθιόντων αὐτῶν εἶπεν· ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι εἷς ἐξ ὑμῶν
παραδώσει με.
26:26 Ἐσθιόντων δὲ αὐτῶν λαβὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἄρτον καὶ εὐλογήσας ἔκλασεν
καὶ δοὺς τοῖς μαθηταῖς εἶπεν· λάβετε φάγετε, τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ σῶμά μου.
26:47 Καὶ ἔτι αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος ἰδοὺ Ἰούδας εἷς τῶν δώδεκα ἦλθεν καὶ μετ᾿
αὐτοῦ ὄχλος πολὺς μετὰ μαχαιρῶν καὶ ξύλων ἀπὸ τῶν ἀρχιερέων καὶ
πρεσβυτέρων τοῦ λαοῦ.
27:1 Πρωΐας δὲ γενομένης συμβούλιον ἔλαβον πάντες οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ
πρεσβύτεροι τοῦ λαοῦ κατὰ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ὥστε θανατῶσαι αὐτόν·
27:17 συνηγμένων οὖν αὐτῶν εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Πιλᾶτος· τίνα θέλετε ἀπολύσω
ὑμῖν, [Ἰησοῦν τὸν] Βαραββᾶν ἢ Ἰησοῦν τὸν λεγόμενον χριστόν;
27:19 Καθημένου δὲ αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος ἀπέστειλεν πρὸς αὐτὸν ἡ
γυνὴ αὐτοῦ λέγουσα· μηδὲν σοὶ καὶ τῷ δικαίῳ ἐκείνῳ· πολλὰ γὰρ ἔπαθον
σήμερον κατ᾿ ὄναρ δι᾿ αὐτόν.
27:57 Ὀψίας δὲ γενομένης ἦλθεν ἄνθρωπος πλούσιος ἀπὸ Ἁριμαθαίας,
τοὔνομα Ἰωσήφ, ὃς καὶ αὐτὸς ἐμαθητεύθη τῷ Ἰησοῦ·
28:11 Πορευομένων δὲ αὐτῶν ἰδού τινες τῆς κουστωδίας ἐλθόντες εἰς τὴν
πόλιν ἀπήγγειλαν τοῖς ἀρχιερεῦσιν ἅπαντα τὰ γενόμενα.
B. The Accusative of General Reference [From the Gospel of Luke]

2:27 καὶ ἦλθεν ἐν τῷ πνεύματι εἰς τὸ ἱερόν· καὶ ἐν τῷ εἰσαγαγεῖν τοὺς γονεῖς
τὸ παιδίον Ἰησοῦν τοῦ ποιῆσαι αὐτοὺς κατὰ τὸ εἰθισμένον τοῦ νόμου περὶ
αὐτοῦ
Syntax Examples 157
3:21 Ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν τῷ βαπτισθῆναι ἅπαντα τὸν λαὸν καὶ Ἰησοῦ βαπτισθέντος
καὶ προσευχομένου ἀνεῳχθῆναι τὸν οὐρανὸν 22 καὶ καταβῆναι τὸ πνεῦμα
τὸ ἅγιον σωματικῷ εἴδει ὡς περιστερὰν ἐπ᾿ αὐτόν, καὶ φωνὴν ἐξ οὐρανοῦ
γενέσθαι, Σὺ εἶ ὁ υἱός μου ὁ ἀγαπητός, ἐν σοὶ εὐδόκησα.
4:41 ἐξήρχετο δὲ καὶ δαιμόνια ἀπὸ πολλῶν κρ[αυγ]άζοντα καὶ λέγοντα ὅτι
Σὺ εἶ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ. καὶ ἐπιτιμῶν οὐκ εἴα αὐτὰ λαλεῖν, ὅτι ᾔδεισαν τὸν
Χριστὸν αὐτὸν εἶναι.
5:1 Ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν τῷ τὸν ὄχλον ἐπικεῖσθαι αὐτῷ καὶ ἀκούειν τὸν λόγον τοῦ
θεοῦ καὶ αὐτὸς ἦν ἑστὼς παρὰ τὴν λίμνην Γεννησαρέτ
5:7 …καὶ ἦλθον καὶ ἔπλησαν ἀμφότερα τὰ πλοῖα ὥστε βυθίζεσθαι αὐτά.
6:6 Ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν ἑτέρῳ σαββάτῳ εἰσελθεῖν αὐτὸν εἰς τὴν συναγωγὴν καὶ
διδάσκειν…
6:12 Ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις ἐξελθεῖν αὐτὸν εἰς τὸ ὄρος
προσεύξασθαι, καὶ ἦν διανυκτερεύων ἐν τῇ προσευχῇ τοῦ θεοῦ.
9:54 ἰδόντες δὲ οἱ μαθηταὶ Ἰάκωβος καὶ Ἰωάννης εἶπαν, Κύριε, θέλεις
εἴπωμεν πῦρ καταβῆναι ἀπὸ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καὶ ἀναλῶσαι αὐτούς;
13:33 πλὴν δεῖ με σήμερον καὶ αὔριον καὶ τῇ ἐχομένῃ πορεύεσθαι, ὅτι οὐκ
ἐνδέχεται προφήτην ἀπολέσθαι ἔξω Ἰερουσαλήμ.
16:17 Εὐκοπώτερον δέ ἐστιν τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ τὴν γῆν παρελθεῖν ἢ τοῦ νόμου
μίαν κεραίαν πεσεῖν.
17:1 Εἶπεν δὲ πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ, Ἀνένδεκτόν ἐστιν τοῦ τὰ σκάνδαλα
μὴ ἐλθεῖν, πλὴν οὐαὶ δι᾿ οὗ ἔρχεται·
20:6 ἐὰν δὲ εἴπωμεν, Ἐξ ἀνθρώπων, ὁ λαὸς ἅπας καταλιθάσει ἡμᾶς,
πεπεισμένος γάρ ἐστιν Ἰωάννην προφήτην εἶναι.
20:27 Προσελθόντες δέ τινες τῶν Σαδδουκαίων, οἱ [ἀντι]λέγοντες ἀνάστασιν
μὴ εἶναι, ἐπηρώτησαν αὐτὸν
20:41 Εἶπεν δὲ πρὸς αὐτούς, Πῶς λέγουσιν τὸν Χριστὸν εἶναι Δαυὶδ υἱόν;
22:15 καὶ εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτούς, Ἐπιθυμίᾳ ἐπεθύμησα τοῦτο τὸ πάσχα φαγεῖν
μεθ᾿ ὑμῶν πρὸ τοῦ με παθεῖν·
158 Appendix H
22:61 καὶ στραφεὶς ὁ κύριος ἐνέβλεψεν τῷ Πέτρῳ, καὶ ὑπεμνήσθη ὁ Πέτρος

τοῦ ῥήματος τοῦ κυρίου ὡς εἶπεν αὐτῷ ὅτι Πρὶν ἀλέκτορα φωνῆσαι
σήμερον ἀπαρνήσῃ με τρίς.
23:2 ἤρξαντο δὲ κατηγορεῖν αὐτοῦ λέγοντες, Τοῦτον εὕραμεν διαστρέφοντα
τὸ ἔθνος ἡμῶν καὶ κωλύοντα φόρους Καίσαρι διδόναι καὶ λέγοντα ἑαυτὸν
Χριστὸν βασιλέα εἶναι.
24:23 καὶ μὴ εὑροῦσαι τὸ σῶμα αὐτοῦ ἦλθον λέγουσαι καὶ ὀπτασίαν
ἀγγέλων ἑωρακέναι, οἳ λέγουσιν αὐτὸν ζῆν.
24:26 οὐχὶ ταῦτα ἔδει παθεῖν τὸν Χριστὸν καὶ εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν δόξαν
αὐτοῦ;
24:46 καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὅτι Οὕτως γέγραπται παθεῖν τὸν Χριστὸν καὶ
ἀναστῆναι ἐκ νεκρῶν τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ,
C. Conditional Sentences [From the Gospel of Matthew]
1. Fulfilled / Almost Certain

4:3 καὶ προσελθὼν ὁ πειράζων εἶπεν αὐτῷ· εἰ υἱὸς εἶ τοῦ θεοῦ, εἰπὲ ἵνα οἱ
λίθοι οὗτοι ἄρτοι γένωνται.
5:13 ὑμεῖς ἐστε τὸ ἅλας τῆς γῆς· ἐὰν δὲ τὸ ἅλας μωρανθῇ, ἐν τίνι ἁλισθήσεται;
εἰς οὐδὲν ἰσχύει ἔτι εἰ μὴ βληθὲν ἔξω καταπατεῖσθαι ὑπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων.
5:29 εἰ δὲ ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου ὁ δεξιὸς σκανδαλίζει σε, ἔξελε αὐτὸν καὶ βάλε
ἀπὸ σοῦ· συμφέρει γάρ σοι ἵνα ἀπόληται ἓν τῶν μελῶν σου καὶ μὴ ὅλον τὸ
σῶμά σου βληθῇ εἰς γέενναν.
6:30 εἰ δὲ τὸν χόρτον τοῦ ἀγροῦ σήμερον ὄντα καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον
βαλλόμενον ὁ θεὸς οὕτως ἀμφιέννυσιν, οὐ πολλῷ μᾶλλον ὑμᾶς,
ὀλιγόπιστοι;
7:11 εἰ οὖν ὑμεῖς πονηροὶ ὄντες οἴδατε δόματα ἀγαθὰ διδόναι τοῖς τέκνοις
ὑμῶν, πόσῳ μᾶλλον ὁ πατὴρ ὑμῶν ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς δώσει ἀγαθὰ τοῖς
αἰτοῦσιν αὐτόν.
8:31 οἱ δὲ δαίμονες παρεκάλουν αὐτὸν λέγοντες· εἰ ἐκβάλλεις ἡμᾶς,
ἀπόστειλον ἡμᾶς εἰς τὴν ἀγέλην τῶν χοίρων.
Syntax Examples 159
11:14 καὶ εἰ θέλετε δέξασθαι, αὐτός ἐστιν Ἠλίας ὁ μέλλων ἔρχεσθαι.
12:26 καὶ εἰ ὁ σατανᾶς τὸν σατανᾶν ἐκβάλλει, ἐφ᾿ ἑαυτὸν ἐμερίσθη· πῶς
οὖν σταθήσεται ἡ βασιλεία αὐτοῦ;
14:28 ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ αὐτῷ ὁ Πέτρος εἶπεν· κύριε, εἰ σὺ εἶ, κέλευσόν με ἐλθεῖν
πρός σε ἐπὶ τὰ ὕδατα.
16:24 Τότε ὁ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ· εἴ τις θέλει ὀπίσω μου ἐλθεῖν,
ἀπαρνησάσθω ἑαυτὸν καὶ ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ καὶ ἀκολουθείτω
μοι.
19:10 Λέγουσιν αὐτῷ οἱ μαθηταὶ [αὐτοῦ]· εἰ οὕτως ἐστὶν ἡ αἰτία τοῦ ἀνθρώπου
μετὰ τῆς γυναικός, οὐ συμφέρει γαμῆσαι.
19:17 ὁ δὲ εἶπεν αὐτῷ· τί με ἐρωτᾷς περὶ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ; εἷς ἐστιν ὁ ἀγαθός· εἰ
δὲ θέλεις εἰς τὴν ζωὴν εἰσελθεῖν, τήρησον τὰς ἐντολάς.
22:45 εἰ οὖν Δαυὶδ καλεῖ αὐτὸν κύριον, πῶς υἱὸς αὐτοῦ ἐστιν;
24:24 ἐγερθήσονται γὰρ ψευδόχριστοι καὶ ψευδοπροφῆται καὶ δώσουσιν
σημεῖα μεγάλα καὶ τέρατα ὥστε πλανῆσαι, εἰ δυνατόν, καὶ τοὺς
ἐκλεκτούς.
26:33 ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ Πέτρος εἶπεν αὐτῷ· εἰ πάντες σκανδαλισθήσονται ἐν
σοί, ἐγὼ οὐδέποτε σκανδαλισθήσομαι.
27:40 καὶ λέγοντες· ὁ καταλύων τὸν ναὸν καὶ ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις οἰκοδομῶν,
σῶσον σεαυτόν, εἰ υἱὸς εἶ τοῦ θεοῦ, [καὶ] κατάβηθι ἀπὸ τοῦ σταυροῦ.
27:43 πέποιθεν ἐπὶ τὸν θεόν, ῥυσάσθω νῦν εἰ θέλει αὐτόν· εἶπεν γὰρ ὅτι
θεοῦ εἰμι υἱός.
2. Probable / Likely / Possible

6:23 ἐὰν δὲ ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου πονηρὸς ᾖ, ὅλον τὸ σῶμά σου σκοτεινὸν ἔσται.
εἰ οὖν τὸ φῶς τὸ ἐν σοὶ σκότος ἐστίν, τὸ σκότος πόσον.
4:9 καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ· ταῦτά σοι πάντα δώσω, ἐὰν πεσὼν προσκυνήσῃς μοι.
5:13 ὑμεῖς ἐστε τὸ ἅλας τῆς γῆς· ἐὰν δὲ τὸ ἅλας μωρανθῇ, ἐν τίνι ἁλισθήσεται;
εἰς οὐδὲν ἰσχύει ἔτι εἰ μὴ βληθὲν ἔξω καταπατεῖσθαι ὑπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων.
160 Appendix H
5:19 ὃς ἐὰν οὖν λύσῃ μίαν τῶν ἐντολῶν τούτων τῶν ἐλαχίστων καὶ
διδάξῃ οὕτως τοὺς ἀνθρώπους, ἐλάχιστος κληθήσεται ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ τῶν
οὐρανῶν·
5:20 Λέγω γὰρ ὑμῖν ὅτι ἐὰν μὴ περισσεύσῃ ὑμῶν ἡ δικαιοσύνη πλεῖον
τῶν γραμματέων καὶ Φαρισαίων, οὐ μὴ εἰσέλθητε εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τῶν
οὐρανῶν.
5:23 ἐὰν οὖν προσφέρῃς τὸ δῶρόν σου ἐπὶ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κἀκεῖ μνησθῇς
ὅτι ὁ ἀδελφός σου ἔχει τι κατὰ σοῦ,
5:32 ἐγὼ δὲ λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι πᾶς ὁ ἀπολύων τὴν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ παρεκτὸς
λόγου πορνείας ποιεῖ αὐτὴν μοιχευθῆναι, καὶ ὃς ἐὰν ἀπολελυμένην
γαμήσῃ, μοιχᾶται.
5:46 ἐὰν γὰρ ἀγαπήσητε τοὺς ἀγαπῶντας ὑμᾶς, τίνα μισθὸν ἔχετε; οὐχὶ καὶ
οἱ τελῶναι τὸ αὐτὸ ποιοῦσιν;
5:47 καὶ ἐὰν ἀσπάσησθε τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς ὑμῶν μόνον, τί περισσὸν ποιεῖτε;
οὐχὶ καὶ οἱ ἐθνικοὶ τὸ αὐτὸ ποιοῦσιν;
6:14 Ἐὰν γὰρ ἀφῆτε τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τὰ παραπτώματα αὐτῶν, ἀφήσει καὶ
ὑμῖν ὁ πατὴρ ὑμῶν ὁ οὐράνιος·
6:15 ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀφῆτε τοῖς ἀνθρώποις, οὐδὲ ὁ πατὴρ ὑμῶν ἀφήσει τὰ
παραπτώματα ὑμῶν.
6:22 Ὁ λύχνος τοῦ σώματός ἐστιν ὁ ὀφθαλμός. ἐὰν οὖν ᾖ ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου
ἁπλοῦς, ὅλον τὸ σῶμά σου φωτεινὸν ἔσται·
6:23 ἐὰν δὲ ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου πονηρὸς ᾖ, ὅλον τὸ σῶμά σου σκοτεινὸν ἔσται.
εἰ οὖν τὸ φῶς τὸ ἐν σοὶ σκότος ἐστίν, τὸ σκότος πόσον.
7:12 Πάντα οὖν ὅσα ἐὰν θέλητε ἵνα ποιῶσιν ὑμῖν οἱ ἄνθρωποι, οὕτως καὶ
ὑμεῖς ποιεῖτε αὐτοῖς· οὗτος γάρ ἐστιν ὁ νόμος καὶ οἱ προφῆται.
8:2 καὶ ἰδοὺ λεπρὸς προσελθὼν προσεκύνει αὐτῷ λέγων· κύριε, ἐὰν θέλῃς
δύνασαί με καθαρίσαι.
9:21 ἔλεγεν γὰρ ἐν ἑαυτῇ· ἐὰν μόνον ἅψωμαι τοῦ ἱματίου αὐτοῦ
σωθήσομαι.
10:13 καὶ ἐὰν μὲν ᾖ ἡ οἰκία ἀξία, ἐλθάτω ἡ εἰρήνη ὑμῶν ἐπ᾿ αὐτήν, ἐὰν δὲ
μὴ ᾖ ἀξία, ἡ εἰρήνη ὑμῶν πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἐπιστραφήτω.
Syntax Examples 161
11:6 καὶ μακάριός ἐστιν ὃς ἐὰν μὴ σκανδαλισθῇ ἐν ἐμοί.
12:11 ὁ δὲ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς· τίς ἔσται ἐξ ὑμῶν ἄνθρωπος ὃς ἕξει πρόβατον ἕν
καὶ ἐὰν ἐμπέσῃ τοῦτο τοῖς σάββασιν εἰς βόθυνον, οὐχὶ κρατήσει αὐτὸ καὶ
ἐγερεῖ;
12:11 ὁ δὲ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς· τίς ἔσται ἐξ ὑμῶν ἄνθρωπος ὃς ἕξει πρόβατον ἕν
καὶ ἐὰν ἐμπέσῃ τοῦτο τοῖς σάββασιν εἰς βόθυνον, οὐχὶ κρατήσει αὐτὸ καὶ
ἐγερεῖ;
12:29 ἢ πῶς δύναταί τις εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν τοῦ ἰσχυροῦ καὶ τὰ σκεύη
αὐτοῦ ἁρπάσαι, ἐὰν μὴ πρῶτον δήσῃ τὸν ἰσχυρόν; καὶ τότε τὴν οἰκίαν αὐτοῦ
διαρπάσει.
12:32 καὶ ὃς ἐὰν εἴπῃ λόγον κατὰ τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, ἀφεθήσεται αὐτῷ·
ὃς δ᾿ ἂν εἴπῃ κατὰ τοῦ πνεύματος τοῦ ἁγίου, οὐκ ἀφεθήσεται αὐτῷ οὔτε ἐν
τούτῳ τῷ αἰῶνι οὔτε ἐν τῷ μέλλοντι.
14:7 ὅθεν μεθ᾿ ὅρκου ὡμολόγησεν αὐτῇ δοῦναι ὃ ἐὰν αἰτήσηται.
15:5 ὑμεῖς δὲ λέγετε· ὃς ἂν εἴπῃ τῷ πατρὶ ἢ τῇ μητρί· δῶρον ὃ ἐὰν ἐξ ἐμοῦ
ὠφεληθῇς,
15:14 ἄφετε αὐτούς· τυφλοί εἰσιν ὁδηγοί [τυφλῶν]· τυφλὸς δὲ τυφλὸν ἐὰν
ὁδηγῇ, ἀμφότεροι εἰς βόθυνον πεσοῦνται.
16:19 δώσω σοι τὰς κλεῖδας τῆς βασιλείας τῶν οὐρανῶν, καὶ ὃ ἐὰν δήσῃς
ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς ἔσται δεδεμένον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς, καὶ ὃ ἐὰν λύσῃς ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
ἔσται λελυμένον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς.
16:25 ὃς γὰρ ἐὰν θέλῃ τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ σῶσαι ἀπολέσει αὐτήν· ὃς δ᾿ ἂν
ἀπολέσῃ τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ εὑρήσει αὐτήν.
16:26 τί γὰρ ὠφεληθήσεται ἄνθρωπος ἐὰν τὸν κόσμον ὅλον κερδήσῃ τὴν
δὲ ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ζημιωθῇ; ἢ τί δώσει ἄνθρωπος ἀντάλλαγμα τῆς ψυχῆς
αὐτοῦ;
17:20 ὁ δὲ λέγει αὐτοῖς· διὰ τὴν ὀλιγοπιστίαν ὑμῶν· ἀμὴν γὰρ λέγω ὑμῖν,
ἐὰν ἔχητε πίστιν ὡς κόκκον σινάπεως, ἐρεῖτε τῷ ὄρει τούτῳ· μετάβα ἔνθεν
ἐκεῖ, καὶ μεταβήσεται· καὶ οὐδὲν ἀδυνατήσει ὑμῖν.
18:3 καὶ εἶπεν· ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ἐὰν μὴ στραφῆτε καὶ γένησθε ὡς τὰ παιδία,
οὐ μὴ εἰσέλθητε εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τῶν οὐρανῶν.
162 Appendix H
18:5 καὶ ὃς ἐὰν δέξηται ἓν παιδίον τοιοῦτο ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου, ἐμὲ
δέχεται.
18:12 Τί ὑμῖν δοκεῖ; ἐὰν γένηταί τινι ἀνθρώπῳ ἑκατὸν πρόβατα καὶ πλανηθῇ
ἓν ἐξ αὐτῶν, οὐχὶ ἀφήσει τὰ ἐνενήκοντα ἐννέα ἐπὶ τὰ ὄρη καὶ πορευθεὶς
ζητεῖ τὸ πλανώμενον;
18:13 καὶ ἐὰν γένηται εὑρεῖν αὐτό, ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι χαίρει ἐπ᾿ αὐτῷ
μᾶλλον ἢ ἐπὶ τοῖς ἐνενήκοντα ἐννέα τοῖς μὴ πεπλανημένοις.
18:15 Ἐὰν δὲ ἁμαρτήσῃ [εἰς σὲ] ὁ ἀδελφός σου, ὕπαγε ἔλεγξον αὐτὸν μεταξὺ
σοῦ καὶ αὐτοῦ μόνου. ἐάν σου ἀκούσῃ, ἐκέρδησας τὸν ἀδελφόν σου·
18:16 ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀκούσῃ, παράλαβε μετὰ σοῦ ἔτι ἕνα ἢ δύο, ἵνα ἐπὶ στόματος
δύο μαρτύρων ἢ τριῶν σταθῇ πᾶν ῥῆμα·
18:17 ἐὰν δὲ παρακούσῃ αὐτῶν, εἰπὲ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ· ἐὰν δὲ καὶ τῆς ἐκκλησίας
παρακούσῃ, ἔστω σοι ὥσπερ ὁ ἐθνικὸς καὶ ὁ τελώνης.
18:18 Ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν· ὅσα ἐὰν δήσητε ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς ἔσται δεδεμένα ἐν
οὐρανῷ, καὶ ὅσα ἐὰν λύσητε ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς ἔσται λελυμένα ἐν οὐρανῷ.
18:19 Πάλιν [ἀμὴν] λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι ἐὰν δύο συμφωνήσωσιν ἐξ ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τῆς
γῆς περὶ παντὸς πράγματος οὗ ἐὰν αἰτήσωνται, γενήσεται αὐτοῖς παρὰ
τοῦ πατρός μου τοῦ ἐν οὐρανοῖς.
18:35 οὕτως καὶ ὁ πατήρ μου ὁ οὐράνιος ποιήσει ὑμῖν, ἐὰν μὴ ἀφῆτε ἕκαστος
τῷ ἀδελφῷ αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ τῶν καρδιῶν ὑμῶν.
20:4 καὶ ἐκείνοις εἶπεν· ὑπάγετε καὶ ὑμεῖς εἰς τὸν ἀμπελῶνα, καὶ ὃ ἐὰν ᾖ
δίκαιον δώσω ὑμῖν.
20:26 οὐχ οὕτως ἔσται ἐν ὑμῖν, ἀλλ᾿ ὃς ἐὰν θέλῃ ἐν ὑμῖν μέγας γενέσθαι
ἔσται ὑμῶν διάκονος,
21:3 καὶ ἐάν τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ τι, ἐρεῖτε ὅτι ὁ κύριος αὐτῶν χρείαν ἔχει· εὐθὺς δὲ
ἀποστελεῖ αὐτούς.
21:21 ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς· ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ἐὰν ἔχητε
πίστιν καὶ μὴ διακριθῆτε, οὐ μόνον τὸ τῆς συκῆς ποιήσετε, ἀλλὰ κἂν τῷ
ὄρει τούτῳ εἴπητε· ἄρθητι καὶ βλήθητι εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν, γενήσεται·
21:24 ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς· ἐρωτήσω ὑμᾶς κἀγὼ λόγον ἕνα,
ὃν ἐὰν εἴπητέ μοι κἀγὼ ὑμῖν ἐρῶ ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιῶ·
Syntax Examples 163
21:25 τὸ βάπτισμα τὸ Ἰωάννου πόθεν ἦν; ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἢ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων; οἱ δὲ
διελογίζοντο ἐν ἑαυτοῖς λέγοντες· ἐὰν εἴπωμεν· ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐρεῖ ἡμῖν· διὰ
τί οὖν οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε αὐτῷ;
21:26 ἐὰν δὲ εἴπωμεν· ἐξ ἀνθρώπων, φοβούμεθα τὸν ὄχλον, πάντες γὰρ ὡς
προφήτην ἔχουσιν τὸν Ἰωάννην.
22:9 πορεύεσθε οὖν ἐπὶ τὰς διεξόδους τῶν ὁδῶν καὶ ὅσους ἐὰν εὕρητε
καλέσατε εἰς τοὺς γάμους.
22:24 λέγοντες· διδάσκαλε, Μωϋσῆς εἶπεν· ἐάν τις ἀποθάνῃ μὴ ἔχων τέκνα,
ἐπιγαμβρεύσει ὁ ἀδελφὸς αὐτοῦ τὴν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ καὶ ἀναστήσει σπέρμα
τῷ ἀδελφῷ αὐτοῦ.
23:3 πάντα οὖν ὅσα ἐὰν εἴπωσιν ὑμῖν ποιήσατε καὶ τηρεῖτε, κατὰ δὲ τὰ ἔργα
αὐτῶν μὴ ποιεῖτε· λέγουσιν γὰρ καὶ οὐ ποιοῦσιν.
24:23 Τότε ἐάν τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ· ἰδοὺ ὧδε ὁ χριστός, ἤ· ὧδε, μὴ πιστεύσητε·
4:26 ἐὰν οὖν εἴπωσιν ὑμῖν· ἰδοὺ ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ ἐστίν, μὴ ἐξέλθητε· ἰδοὺ ἐν τοῖς
ταμείοις, μὴ πιστεύσητε·
24:28 ὅπου ἐὰν ᾖ τὸ πτῶμα, ἐκεῖ συναχθήσονται οἱ ἀετοί.
26:13 ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅπου ἐὰν κηρυχθῇ τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦτο ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ
κόσμῳ, λαληθήσεται καὶ ὃ ἐποίησεν αὕτη εἰς μνημόσυνον αὐτῆς.
26:42 πάλιν ἐκ δευτέρου ἀπελθὼν προσηύξατο λέγων· πάτερ μου, εἰ οὐ
δύναται τοῦτο παρελθεῖν ἐὰν μὴ αὐτὸ πίω, γενηθήτω τὸ θέλημά σου.
28:14 καὶ ἐὰν ἀκουσθῇ τοῦτο ἐπὶ τοῦ ἡγεμόνος, ἡμεῖς πείσομεν [αὐτὸν] καὶ
ὑμᾶς ἀμερίμνους ποιήσομεν.
3. Impossible
11:21 οὐαί σοι, Χοραζίν, οὐαί σοι, Βηθσαϊδά· ὅτι εἰ ἐν Τύρῳ καὶ Σιδῶνι
ἐγένοντο αἱ δυνάμεις αἱ γενόμεναι ἐν ὑμῖν, πάλαι ἂν ἐν σάκκῳ καὶ σποδῷ
μετενόησαν.
164 Appendix H
23:30 καὶ λέγετε· εἰ ἤμεθα ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, οὐκ ἂν ἤμεθα
αὐτῶν κοινωνοὶ ἐν τῷ αἵματι τῶν προφητῶν.
24:22 καὶ εἰ μὴ ἐκολοβώθησαν αἱ ἡμέραι ἐκεῖναι, οὐκ ἂν ἐσώθη πᾶσα σάρξ·
διὰ δὲ τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς κολοβωθήσονται αἱ ἡμέραι ἐκεῖναι.
24:43 Ἐκεῖνο δὲ γινώσκετε ὅτι εἰ ᾔδει ὁ οἰκοδεσπότης ποίᾳ φυλακῇ ὁ κλέπτης
ἔρχεται, ἐγρηγόρησεν ἂν καὶ οὐκ ἂν εἴασεν διορυχθῆναι τὴν οἰκίαν αὐτοῦ.
26:24 ὁ μὲν υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ὑπάγει καθὼς γέγραπται περὶ αὐτοῦ, οὐαὶ
δὲ τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ ἐκείνῳ δι᾿ οὗ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται· καλὸν ἦν
αὐτῷ εἰ οὐκ ἐγεννήθη ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἐκεῖνος.
4. Remotely Possible (rare in the NT)

Luke 8:9 Ἐπηρώτων δὲ αὐτὸν οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ τίς αὕτη εἴη ἡ παραβολή.
______________________________________ A Parsing Guide 165
APPENDIX I
Parsing Guide
Only provide information for a given word where an “x” occurs.

Tense Voice Mode* Person Case Number Gender
VERB x x x x x
NOUN x x x
INFINITIVE x x x
PARTICIPLE x x x x x x
*Include in this column the appropriate information if the word being parsed is a participle
or an infinitive.
Options for the above categories: [With suggested abbreviation]

Tense: Present Pres
Imperfect Impf
Future Fut
Aorist Aor (both 1 and 2 are included)
Perfect Perf
Pluperfect Plupf
Voice: Active Act

Middle Mid
Passive Pass
Deponent Dep (mid/pass. in form, but active in trans.)
Mode: Indicative Ind

Subjunctive Subj
Imperative Impv
[Participle] Part
[Infinitive] Inf
Person: 1, 2, 3
Case: Nom., Gen., Dat., Acc.
Number: Singular S or Sing

Plural P or Pl
Gender: Masculine Masc

Feminine Fem
Neuter Neut
166 Appendix J
APPENDIX J
Palatals, Labials, Dentals and Liquids
Palatals, Labials, Dentals [Verbs and Nouns]

Category Expected Form Actual NT Form
Palatals: γ, κ, χ + σ = ξ Future act. ind. διδάκσει διδάξει
Aorist act. ind. ἐδίδακσα ἐδίδαξα
Labials: π, β, φ + σ = γ Aorist act. ind. ἔγραφσα ἔγραψα
Future act. ind. πέμπσω πέμψω
Dentals: τ, δ, θ + σ = σ Aorist act. ind. ἔσωζσεν* ἔσωσεν
Future act. ind. πείθσομεν πείσομεν
*The stem for σώζω is σωδ
Palatals, Labials, Dentals and Liquids 167
Liquid Verbs
t The Stem of these verbs end with one of these letters: λ μ ν ρ and cannot take the tense
identifiers(Minimum Four):
t Future active and middle: -σ
t Future passive: -θησ
t Aorist active and middle: -σα
t Aorist passive: -θη
t Perfect active: - κα
t Perfect middle/passive: --(none)
WORD Form Expected Form Actual NT Form

μένω Aorist act. ind.. ἔμενσεν ἔμεινεν
μένω Future act. ind. μένσετε μενεῖτε
ἀποστέλλω Aorist act. subj. ἀποστέλλσῃ ἀποστείλῃ
ἀποστέλλω Future act. ind. ἀποστέλλσει ἀποστελεῖ
ἀποστέλλω Perfect act. ind. ἀπέστελλκεν ἀπέσταλκεν
ἀποστέλλω Perfect pass. part. ἀπεστέλλμένος ἀπεσταλμένος
ἀποκρίνομαι Aorist pass. ind. ἀπεκρίνθησαν ἀπεκρίθησαν
ἀποκρίνομαι Future pass. ind.. ἀποκρινθήσονται ἀποκριθήσονται
168 Appendix K
APPENDIX K
Glossary of Terms
[The INDEX indicates where these terms are discussed within the book]
Note: Within the definition section, words that have their own entry are printed in bold. See,
for example, in the first entry on “accents,” the word “diphthong.”
Accents The diagonal lines over a vowel or diphthong showing which
syllable receives the prominent pitch. See Lesson 1.
Acute Accent Forward sloping mark (ά)
Circumflex Accent Combination of the acute and grave accents (οῦ)
Grave Accent Backward sloping mark (ὰ)
Accusative Case (see Case)
Acute Accent (see Accents)
Aorist Tense (see Tense)
Active Voice (see Voice)
Adjective A word that gives descriptive information about a noun or
pronoun.
Adverb A word that gives defining information about the verb such as: how
the action occurs, to what degree, when it occurs, etc.
Augment In the indicative mode, all of the tenses that refer to an action in
the past have an “e” augment (“e” for earlier—earlier than now).
When a word begins with a vowel the augment and the initial
vowel most often become “η” and sometimes “ει.”
Case
Accusative Case The direct object; shows goal or limit of an action and answers
“what” of the verb.3
Dative Case4 The indirect object. Also known as the “preposition” case because
most of the prepositions we supply in English (to, for, at, by, in,
with, etc.) take this case.
3. Or “who” if a person is involved, and the verb “to be” is not part of the construction.
4. Some grammars include the Locative and Instrumental cases, which have the same form as the Dative, and the choice of
preposition would reflect these finer distinctions.
Glossary of Terms 169
Genitive Case5 The case showing possession and separation.
Nominative Case The subject of a clause or sentence. The case that always follows the
verb “to be.”
Vocative Case Person(s) being addressed: “Ladies and Gentlemen.” It has the
same form as the Nominative in almost all instances. The second
declension singular is an exception.6
Conjugation When all the forms of a verb are given, the tense, voice, mode,
person and number, the verb has been conjugated.
Conjunction A word that joins clauses and sentences. It includes such words as:
and, for, etc., and is not related to “declension.”
Connecting vowel The first vowel or diphthong following the stem of a verb or
participle. It is either: ε, ο, or ου.
Continuous Action Ongoing action, linear. Opposed to Point Action. Important
distinctions for the Subjunctive and Imperative Modes.
Copycat 2 Aorist The 2nd aorist verb copies the endings of the Present Tense in
every single form except for the Indicative Mode. But even in the
Indicative Mode, it remains a “copycat” tense, for in the indicative
it copies the Imperfect Tense endings. See Tense: Aorist. See
Lesson 8.
Crasis The spelling of two words that have joined to form one word.
Example: “and” (καί) and “I” (ἐγώ) show up as κἀγώ and are
translated: “And I ...”
Dative Case (see Case)
Declension Giving all of the possible forms of a given word according to the
function of a word, both singular and plural. See the entry on Case
above.
First Declension Spelling pattern that consists mostly of the feminine gender
Second Declension Spelling pattern that consists mostly of the masculine and neuter
genders.
Third Declension Spelling pattern that consists of all three genders with the masculine
and feminine being identical.
5. Some grammars use the Ablative case, which has the same form as the Genitive, for the concept of separation or direction
from.
6. To illustrate: In the vocative plural, the noun ἄνθρωποι is spelled ἄνθρωποι for both the nominative and the vocative.
The nominative singular, though, is spelled: ἄνθρωπε—an exception to the basic rule.
170 Appendix K
Dentals: τ δ θ: When a sigma is joined to any of these letters, the result is a

ς
Dieresis When two vowels side by side are not a diphthong and are therefore
pronounced separately, the second vowel will have two horizontal
dots over it.
Deponent Voice (see Voice)
Diphthong Two vowels side by side that are treated as one. English example:
the “ou” in the word group. See Lesson 1.
First Declension (see Declension)
Future Tense (see Tense)
Elision When letters are omitted, the single quotation mark (’) is used.
Example in English: I’ll for I will.
Gender Masculine, Neuter, and Feminine
Grave Accent (see Accents)
Imperative Mode (see Mode)
Imperfect Tense (see Tense)
Indicative Mode (see Mode)
K–aorist The –μι verb uses the tense identifier of the perfect tense: –
κα. The two tenses can be distinguished by the characteristic
reduplication of the perfect tense. See Lesson 9
Koine The Greek used in the New Testament. See Lesson 1.
Labials π β φ: When a sigma is joined to any one of these letters, the result
is a ψ
Liquids λ μ ν ρ: When a sigma is normally expected in the ending of the
1 aorist and future tenses, these letters cannot accept the sigma. In
such cases the stem of the verb is altered.
Minimums The Eight Minimums given in this textbook represent the core
grammatical constructions upon which the entire approach to
beginning Greek is based. Listed in Appendix K.
Middle Voice (see Voice)
Mode Refers to the speaker’s attitude toward the action of the verb.
Imperative Mode Speaker commands an act.
Indicative Mode Speaker refers to an act as a fact.
Subjunctive Mode Speaker regards the act as possible or as a wish.
Nominative Case (see Case)
Noun A word that names a person, place, or thing.
Number singular or plural
Present Tense (see Tense)
Palatals γ κ χ: When a sigma is jointed to any one of these letters, the
result is a ξ
Participle A verbal adjective (it is part verb and part adjective. (See Lesson
7)
Passive Voice (see Voice)
Perfect Tense (see Tense)
Person First Person (I or We); Second Person (You); Third Person (He, It,
She / They)
Pluperfect Tense (see Tense)
Point Action Action that is not ongoing. In the Subjunctive and Imperative
Modes, the emphasis is on the beginning of an act. See Continuous
Action.
Preposition Small words (to, for, by, with, in, etc.) positioned in front of a word
(pre–positioned) showing function or relationship to the words on
either side of it.
Pronoun Takes the place of the antecedent noun (he, it, she, they …)
Reduplication This term applies to two verb forms. (1) The most common use
is with the perfect tense (and pluperfect) in which all verbs that
begin with a consonant duplicate that consonant in front of the
augment. (2) The less common use is with the –μι verb where the
present and imperfect tenses reduplicate with an iota (ι).
Second Declension (see Declension)
Subjunctive Mode (see Mode)
Tense: In the Indicative Mode, the time element. In the Subjunctive and
Imperative, the kind of action (Point or Continuous)
172 Appendix K
Aorist Tense Indicative Mode: the simple past. Subjunctive and Imperative
Modes: point action
1 Aorist Regular conjugation
2 Aorist Irregular conjugation in which the stem changes. Also called in
this book the “copycat” 2 aorist because it copies the present tense
endings in all forms except the imperfect tense, and then the 2
aorist copies the imperfect endings.
K–Aorist This applies to the –μι verbs where the aorist tense has a “κ” just
like the perfect tense. See Lesson 9 where the distinctions between
the two verb forms using the “κ” are given.
Imperfect Tense Ongoing action in past time
Future Tense Occurring in the future
Pluperfect Tense Both the simple past and ongoing action in the past
Perfect Tense Both the simple past and ongoing action into the present
Present Tense Indicative Mode: Occurring in the present. Subjunctive and
Imperative Modes: continuous action.
Tense Identifiers: the letters that identify the Greek tense. See Lesson 6
–σ Future Active and Future Middle
–θησ Future Passive
–σα Aorist Active and Aorist Middle
–θη (θε) (θ) 7
Aorist Passive
–κα Perfect Active
–(no connecting vowel) Perfect Middle and Passive
The –μι Verb An older form of the Greek verb that persisted in NT times for
a few important verbs. Their chief identifying marks are the iota
reduplication in the present and imperfect tenses and the absence
of a connecting vowel in the all of the Secondary tenses (except
for the imperfect tense which has the iota reduplication to make its
identification clear). See Lesson 9.
The Third Declension (see Declension)
Transliteration Using English letters to represent the corresponding Greek letters.
Verb A word that expresses action.
7. The –θη shortens to –θε in the participle and to just –θ in the subjunctive mode.
Verb “to be” A verb that connects two words in the nominative case (I am a man
/ I became a teacher). It functions as an “equals” sign.
Vocative Case (see Case)
Voice Shows the relationship of the subject to the action

Active Subject is doing the action (The person eats fruit).
Deponent A verb that has the middle/passive form but is translated as an
active.
Middle Subject is doing to action to self or for self (He washes his face).
Passive Subject is receiving the action (The fruit is eaten by her).
Did You Know ...

That the Greek text upon which the older English translations are
based and the Greek text upon which the modern translations are
based agree over 95 percent of the time? And in the places where
they differ, no major Christian teaching is affected.
174 Appendix L
APPENDIX L
The Eight Minimums
First, the Minimums are named and the value of each one is mentioned. Second, the Minimums
themselves are listed. As noted, the great majority of beginning Greek grammar is built on these
Minimums!
The precise name of the “Minimum” is emphasized by underlining. This name is important for
referencing new material within the building process.
Minimum One: Endings of the First and Second Declensions (using the adjective
ἀγαθός)
What is the value? In addition to the three sets of endings of ἀγαθός, 40 additional forms of
the first and second declensions will be learned, making a total of 43 forms for learning the three
forms in Minimum One. These additional 40 forms are listed in Lesson 3 where Minimum One
is introduced.
Minimum Two: Endings of the Third Declension

What is the value? The two endings of the Third Declension are the endings of a total of 18
declensions. When this Minimum is combined with the first Minimum, the endings of every
major declension in the New Testament are learned!
Minimum Three: The Four Basic Verb Forms

What is the value? You will know the following three verb tenses and all three voices in the
indicative mode (from which all tenses are built in the indicative mode—given in Minimum Four):
1. Present (two forms)
2. Imperfect (two forms) / 2 aorist copies the imperfect tense (2 forms)
These “Four Foundational” forms not only give us six verb endings, but are the foundation for all
other verbs in the New Testament.
The Eight Minimums 175
Minimum Four: The Tense Identifiers
What is the value? The immediate identification of any tense of a verb or participle whether
or not the definition of the word is known; these “tense identifiers” are also part of the next
Minimum. This is an unbelievably valuable Minimum!
NOTE: The next three Minimums are the easiest of all because they are built on the first four
Minimums!
Minimum Five: Application of the Tense Identifiers to the Basic Four Verb Forms (or
Applying Minimum Four to Minimum Three)
What is the value? Because all tenses in the indicative mode are built on the basic four conjugations
via an application of the tense identifiers given in Minimum Four, you will know all of the Greek
verb forms in the indicative mode, and be able to recognize them immediately without having to
process the identification with a table or chart.
Minimum Six: The Participle (here Minimums One, Two, and Four are all
utilized)
What is the value? All active voice participles (and the aorist passive participle) are built on the
participle of εἰμί along with the application of the tense identifiers of Minimum Four.
The final letters of this participle in the masculine and neuter genders are also the endings of the
third declension (Minimum Two) and for the feminine, the endings in Minimum One.
The middle/passive participle is covered under this Minimum and they are built on Minimums
One and Four.
Minimum Seven: Subjunctive and Imperative Modes (the Subjunctive is built on

Minimum Three.
What is the value? All of the active voice subjunctives as well as the aorist passive are built on this
form
Minimum Eight: Four Points for the –μι Verb

What is the value? The very complex –μι verb is made simple.
176 Appendix L
The Eight Minimums
Minimum One
The Endings of the First and Second Declensions
MASCULINE NEUTER FEMININE8

SINGULAR
Nom. –ος –ον –η
Gen. –ου –ης
Dat. –ῳ –ῃ
Acc. –ον –ην
PLURAL
Nom. –οι –α –αι
Gen. –ων –ων
Dat. –οις –αις
Acc. –ους –ας
8. There are four variations of the first declension singular, discussed in Lesson 3 in which the final letter of the nominative
singular can be a long or short “a”—η or α.
Minimum Two
Endings of the Third Declension
MASCULINE/FEMININE NEUTER
SINGULAR
Nom. –ς or –none –none
Gen. –ος
Dat. –ι
Acc. –α or ν
PLURAL
Nom. –ες –α
Gen. –ων
Dat. –σι
Acc. –ας
[Minimums One and Two cover almost every noun, pronoun and adjective in all genders
in the entire New Testament.]
178 Appendix L
Minimum Three
The Four Basic Verb Forms
The Time Factor:

NOW
(+ ε augment)
IMPERFECT Tense Endings PRESENT Tense Endings
Active Voice Middle/passive Active Voice Middle/Passive
Num. Per Voices Voices
1 –ον –ομην –ω –ομαι
SG 2 –ες –ου –εις –ῃ (σαι)
3 –ε(ν) –ετο –ει –εται
1 –ομεν –ομεθα –ομεν –ομεθα
PL 2 –ετε –εσθε –ετε –εσθε
3 –ον –οντο –ουσι(ν) –ονται
Minimum Four
Tense Identifiers
—σ Future (active and middle)

—θησ Future (passive)
—σα (σ)* 1 Aorist (active and middle)
—θη (θε) (θ)** 1 Aorist (passive)
—κα (κ)*** Perfect (active)
—(none) Perfect (middle /passive)
The next three Minimums are merely an application of the first four.
Minimum Five
Formation of Remaining Tenses in Indicative Mode
The Time Factor:

NOW
(+ ε augment)
With IMPERFECT Tense Endings With PRESENT Tense Endings
Voices Voices
Aorist active: replace Aorist middle: Future active: place Future middle: place
connecting vowel* replace connecting σ before connecting σ before connecting
with: σα vowel with: σα vowel vowel
Aor. passive:**replace Future passive:

connecting vowel with: place θησ before
θη connecting vowel
Perf. active: replace Perf. middle/passive:
connecting vowel with: remove connecting
κα vowel
* The connecting vowel is either an ο or an ε—the first vowel of the ending.
**The aorist passive always follows the active voice model.
Making it simple:
On the left side of NOW: replace the connecting vowel with the Tense Identifier
One the right side of NOW: place the Tense Identifier in front of the connecting vowel
(For the Perfect middle/passive this means to eliminate the connecting vowel)
180 Appendix L
Minimum Six–A
The Participle of εἰμί

SINGULAR
ὤν ὄν οὔσα
ὄντος οὔσης
ὄντι οὔσῃ
ὄντα οὖσαν
PLURAL
ὄντες ὄντα οὖσαι
ὄντων οὐσῶν
οὖσι οὔσαις
ὄντας οὔσας
Minimum Six – B
The Middle/Passive Participle

SINGULAR
Nom. –μεν ος –μεν ον –μεν η
Gen. –μεν ου –μεν ης
Dat. –μεν ῳ –μεν ῃ
Acc. –μεν ον –μεν ην
PLURAL
Nom. –μεν οι –μεν α –μεν αι
Gen. –μεν ων –μεν ων
Dat. –μεν οις –μεν αις
Acc. –μεν ους –μεν ας
182 Appendix L
Minimum Seven –A
Subjunctive of εἰμί
1 ὦ
SG 2 ᾖς
3 ᾖ
1 ὦμεν
PL 2 ἦτε
3 ὦσι(ν)
Minimum Seven—B
Imperative Mode
SG 2
3 –τω
PL 2
3 –τωσαν
The Minimum for this mode is the two endings: –τω and –τωσαν.
PRESENT ACTIVE (Insert connecting vowel—always ε)
SG 2 λῦε PL 2 λύετε
3 λυέτω 3 λυέτωσαν
AORIST ACTIVE (replace connecting vowel with –σα)

SG 2 λύσον PL 2 λύσατε
3 λυσάτω 3 λυσάτωσαν
AORIST PASSIVE (replace connecting vowel with –θη)

SG 2 λύθητι PL 2 λύθητε
3 λυθήτω 3 λυθήτωσαν
300 Basic Vocabulary Words 183
PRESENT MIDDLE/PASSIVE
SG 2 λύου PL 2 λύεσθε
3 λυέσθω 3 λυέσθωσαν
AORIST MIDDLE
SG 2 λύσαι PL 2 λύσασθε
3 λυσάσθω 3 λυσάσθωσαν
Minimum Eight
The –μι Verb
1. Vowel stem may be short or long.

δο / δω (δίδωμι)
θε / θη (τίθημι)
στα / στη (ἳστημι)
φε / φη (ἀφίημι)
2. Iota reduplication occurs only in present and imperfect tenses.

Observe the iota at the beginning of these key –μι verbs:
δίδωμι
τίθημι
ἳστημι
ἀφίημι (third letter)
If there is an iota, the verb has to be present or imperfect; if imperfect, there is an augment.
3. All other tenses do not have the iota reduplication and the endings
follow the omega conjugation (λύω)
4. The aorist tense identifier is –κα instead of –σα.
184 Appendix M
APPENDIX M
300 Basic Vocabulary Words
In column one, the number of the lesson is given where the word is introduced. The gender of a
noun is indicated by the letter(s) preceding the entry. Adjectives and pronouns have the masculine
gender given in full with the endings of the neuter and feminine genders following (as in the first
word below). When a word is followed by an entry in parenthesis, the reader can know that the
word is a third–declension word. See Lesson 4.
Α
3 ἀγαθός, –ον, –η good, useful
6 ἀγαπάω I love
3 ἡ ἀγάπη love
5 ἀγαπητός, –ον, –η beloved
3 ὁ ἄγγελος messenger, angel
5 ἅγιος, –ον, –α holy
7 ἄγω I go, lead, bring
6 ὁ ἀδελφός brother
4 τό αἷμα (αἴματος) blood
9 αἴρω I raise, take up, take away
7 αἰτέω I ask, demand
4 ὁ αἰών (αιῶνος) age, eternity
5 αἰώνιος, –ον eternal
7 ἀκολουθέω I follow
5 ἀκούω I hear, listen (may expect a response)
5 ἡ ἀλήθεια truth
3 ἀλλά but, yet, except
5 ἀλλήλων of one another
3 ἄλλος, –o, –η other, another
3 ἡ ἁμαρτία sin [to miss the mark—known and unknown “misses”]
3 ἀμήν verily, truly, amen, so let it be
8 ἄν untranslatable, used to make a definite statement contingent
upon something.
7 ἀναβαίνω I go up, ascend
4 ὁ ἀνήρ (ἀνδρός) man, male, husband
3 ὁ ἄνθρωπος person, mankind, people, humankind, human being, man
9 ἀνίστημι I rise up, stand
7 ἀνοίγω I open
6 ἀπέρχομαι I go away
3 ἀπό gen: (away) from
7 ἀποθνήσκω I die
6 ἀποκρίνομαι I answer
7 ἀποκτείνω I kill, slay
7 ἀπόλλυμι I destroy, loose; mid. = die
7 ἀπολύω I release, send away, dismiss
7 ἀποστέλλω I send away (a liquid verb) [απο +στελλω]
3 ὁ ἀπόστολος apostle, envoy, messenger
9 ὁ ἄρτος bread, loaf, food
5 ἡ ἀρχή beginning, ruler, authority
4 ὁ ἀρχιερεύς (ἀρχιερέως) chief priest, high priest
8 ἄρχω active: I rule; middle: I begin
6 ἀσπάζομαι I greet
3 αὔτος, –o, –η he, it, she [him/it/herself ]; same
186 Appendix M
9 ἀφίημι I let go, leave, forgive, divorce (a “k” aorist)

Β
6 βάλλω I throw, cast, place
7 βαπτίζω I baptize
3 ἡ βασιλεία kingdom
4 ὁ βασιλεύς, (βασιλέως) king
3 βλέπω I see, look at
Γ
3 γάρ for, then
6 γεννάω I bear, beget, produce
7 ἡ γῆ earth, land
6 γίνομαι I become, be
3 γινώσκω I know (relational knowledge)
7 ἡ γλῶσσα tongue, language
4 ὁ γραμματεύς, (γραμματέως) scribe
5 ἡ γράφη scripture, Scripture, writing
5 γράφω I write
4 ἡ γυνή, (γυναικός) woman, wife
Δ
7 τό δαιμόνιον demon
3 δέ but, and
7 δεῖ it is necessary (from δέω=I bind)
7 δέξιος, –ον, –α right
6 δέχομαι I receive
3 διά gen: through; acc: on account of, because of
6 ὁ διδάσκαλος teacher
6 διδάσκω I teach
9 δίδωμι / εδωκα I give / I gave (a “k” aorist)
6 διέρχομαι I go through
5 δικαιος, –ον, –α just, righteous
6 ἡ δικαιοσύνη righteousness, justice
7 διό therefore
7 δοκέω I think, suppose [δοκει= it seems]
3 ἡ δόξα glory, majesty, fame
8 δοξάζω I glorify, praise, honor
7 ὁ δοῦλος servant, slave
6 δύναμαι I am powerful, am able
4 ἡ δύναμις (δυνάμεως) power, miracle
9 δύο two
7 δώδεκα, –ον, –η twelve [2 + 10]
Ε
7 ἑαυτοῦ, –ης singular: of himself/herself/itself; plural: of themselves
8 ἐγείρω I raise up
7 ἐγένετο (2 aorist of γινομαι) (usually 3rd pers. singular)=It
happened / It came to pass.
8 ἐαν if (εἰ + ἄν; with subjunctive)
3 ἐγώ I
4 τό ἔθνος, (ἔθνους) nation, Gentile
6 εἰ if
7 εἴδον (2 aorist of ὁραω) I saw
188 Appendix M
6 εἰμί I am (the verb “to be”)

7 εἴπον (εἴπαν) (2 aorist of λεγω) I said
7 ἡ εἰρήνη peace
6 εἰς acc: into, in, toward
5 εἷς, ἕν, μία one
6 εἰσέρχομαι I go into, enter
9 εἴτε if, whether
3 ἐκ, ἐξ gen: from, out of
9 ἓκαστος, –ον, –η each, every
6 ἐκβάλλω I throw out, cast out, remove
7 ἐκεῖ there (compare ἐκεῖνος)
3 ἐκεῖνος, –o, –η that
6 ἡ ἐκκλησία a church, (the) Church, assembly, congregation
4 ἡ ἐλπίς (ελπίδος) hope, expectation
5 ἐμός, ἐμόν, ἐμή my, mine
3 ἐν dat: in, on, among
5 ἡ ἐντολή commandment
6 ἐνώπιον gen: before, in the presence of
6 ἐξέρχομαι I go out, come out
3 ἡ ἐξουσία authority, power
6 ἔξω gen: outside; adverb: without
6 ἐπαγγελία promise
6 ἐπερωτάω I ask, entreat
6 ἐπί , ἐπ᾿, ἐφ᾿ gen: on, over, when; on basis of; dat: on, in at, over, on the
basis of, at; acc: across, up to, toward, against
7 ἑπτά seven
3 τό ἔργον work, deed, action
6 ἔρχομαι I come, go
7 ἐρῶ I will say
6 ἐρωτάω I ask
7 ἐσθίω I eat
4 ἐστίν he, it, she is (verb “to be”)
6 ἔσχατος, –ον, –η last
9 ἕτερος, –ον, –α other, another, different
9 ἔτι still, yet, even
8 εὐανγγελίζω I evangelize
3 τό εὐαγγέλιον good news, Gospel
7 εὐθύς immediately
8 εὑρίσκω I find
7 ἔφαγον (2 aorist of ἐσθίω) I ate
3 ἔχω I have, hold
5 ἕως until; gen: as far as / outside
Ζ
9 ζάω I live
3 ζητέω I seek, desire, try to obtain
3 ἡ ζωή life
Η
7 ἤ or
5 ἤδη now, already
7 ἤλθον (2 aorist of ἔρχομαι) I came, went
190 Appendix M
5 ἡμεῖς we (first pers. pro. pl.)

3 ἡ ἡμέρα day
5 ἤν he, it, she was (imperfect of verb “to be”)
Θ
3 ἡ θάλασσα sea, lake
7 ὁ θάνατος death
4 τό θέλημα (θελήματος) will, desire
7 θέλω I will, wish
3 ὁ θέος God, god
7 θεωρέω I behold
7 ὁ θρόνος throne
Ι
8 ἴδιος, –ον, –α one’s own (e.g., people, home)
6 ἰδού See! Behold!
9 τό ἱερόν temple
9 τό ἱμάτιον garment
5 ἳνα in order that, that
9 ἵστημι I place, set, stand (not a “k” aorist)
Κ
7 κάγώ and I, but I [καί and ἐγώ]
6 κάθημαι I sit down
5 καθώς as, even as
3 καί and, even, also, namely
3 ὁ καιρός time (appointed), season
3 κακός, –ον, –η evil, bad, wrong
3 καλέω I call, name, invite
6 καλός, –ον, –η beautiful, good
3 ἡ καρδία heart
8 ὁ καρπός fruit, crop, result
6 κατά gen: down from, against; acc: according to, throughout,
during
7 καταβαίνω I go down
8 ἡ κεφαλή head
7 κηρύσσω I preach, proclaim
3 ὁ κόσμος world, universe, humankind; adornment
7 κράζω I cry out
7 κρίνω I judge
3 ὁ κύριος Lord, lord, master
Λ
3 λαλέω speak, say
6 λαμβάνω I take, receive
8 ὁ λαός people, crowd
3 λέγω I say, speak [Cf. λόγος]
7 ὁ λίθος stone
3 ὁ λόγος word, Word, speech, message
8 λοιπός, –ον, –η adj.: remaining, left; as a noun: the rest; adv.: from now
on
Μ
7 μαθητής, –οῦ, ὁ disciple [μαθάνω = I learn]
8 μακάριος, –ον, –α blessed, happy, fortunate
7 μάλλον more, rather
192 Appendix M
5 μαρτυρέω I witness, testify

7 μέγας, μέγα, μεγάλη large, great
8 μέλλω I am about to ...
7 μέν on the one hand, indeed
5 μένω I remain
7 μέσος, –ον, –η midst
6 μετά gen: with; acc: after
8 μή no, not, lest (with Subunctive and Imperative modes)
8 μηδέ and not, neither
8 μηδείς, –εν[], –μια not one; [nothing]
4 ἡ μητήρ (μητρός) mother
6 μόνος, –ον, –η only, alone
Ν
5 νεκρός, –ον, –α dead, corpse
8 ὁ νόμος law
3 νῦν now
4 ἡ νύξ, (νυκτός) night
Ο
3 ὁ, το, ἡ the [masculine, neuter, feminine, respectively]
8 ἡ ὁδός way
3 οἶδα I know, understand [intellectual knowing]
7 ἡ οἰκία house, household
7 ὁ οἴκος house, household
6 ὅλος, –ον, –η whole, complete
4 τό ὄνομα (ὀνόματος) name
6 ὅπου adv. of place where; whereas, since.
7 ὅπως that, in order that; adverb: how, in what way
6 ὁράω I see
4 τό ὄρος (ὄρους) mountain, hill
ὅς, [ὅ], ἥ who, which, [what]
7 ὅσος, –ον, –η as great as, as many as
5 ὅστις, [ὅτι], ἥτις whoever; [whatever]
8 ὅταν whenever (ὃτε + ἄν)
8 ὅτε when, while
3 ὃτι that, since, because
3 οὐ, οὐκ, οὐχ no, not (with indicative mode)
6 οὐδέ and not, not even, neither, nor [combination of οὐ and
δέ].
5 οὐδείς, [οὐδέν], οὐδεμία no one, none; [nothing]
6 οὖν therefore, then, accordingly
3 ὁ οὐρανός heaven, sky
8 οὔτε and not, neither—nor
3 οὗτος, τοῦτο, αὓτη this
5 οὕτως thus, so
8 οὐχί not, emphatic NO (no indeed)
5 ὁ ὀφθαλμός eye
7 ὁ ὄχλος crowd
Π
6 τό παιδίον little child
6 πάλιν again
194 Appendix M
6 παρά gen: from; dat: beside, in the presence of; acc: alongside
of
7 ἡ παραβολή parable [παρά + βάλλω]
9 παραδίδωμι I give over, entrust; betray (a “k” aorist)
6 παρακαλέω I request, entreat
4 πᾶς (παντός), πᾶν πᾶσα all, each, every
4 ὁ πατήρ (πατρός) father
8 πείθω I persuade, convince
7 πέμπω I send
4 περί gen: concerning, about; acc: around
5 περιπατέω I walk, conduct myself
8 πίνω I drink
7 πίπτω I fall
7 πιστεύω I trust, believe (πιστις)
4 ἡ πίστις (πίστεως) faithfulness, faith, belief
5 πιστός, –ον, –η faithful, believing
8 πλείων more (comparative of πολυς)
5 πληρόω I fulfill, fill
8 τό πλοῖον boat
4 τό πνεῦμα (πνεύματος) spirit, Spirit, wind, breath,
5 ποιέω I do, I make
4 ἡ πόλις (πόλεως) city
7 πολύς, πολύ, πολλή singular: much; plural: many; adverb: often
5 πονηρός, –ον, –α evil, bad
6 πορεύομαι I go, come
4 ὁ πούς (ποδός) foot
8 πρεσβύτερος, –ον, –α elder
5 πρός gen: to the advantage of / dat: near, at, by / acc: toward,
with [proselyte (προ + ηλθον)
6 προσέρχομαι I go toward
6 προσεύχομαι I pray
8 προσκυνέω I worship
8 τό πρόσωπον face
3 ὁ προφήτης prophet
5 πρῶτον adv: earlier, next
5 πρῶτος, -ον, η adj: first (versus ἔσχατος)
4 τό πῦρ (πυρός) fire
7 πῶς how?
Ρ
4 τό ῥήμα (ῥήματος) word, saying
Σ
4 ἡ σάρξ (σαρκός) flesh, body
7 τό σημεῖον sign, miracle
8 ἡ σοφία wisdom
8 σπείρω I sow
4 τό στόμα (στόματος) mouth
3 σύ you (singular)
6 σύν dat: with
7 συνάγω I gather together
196 Appendix M
7 ἡ συναγωγή synagogue (gathering place)

7 σώζω I save (spiritually heal)
4 τό σῶμα (σώματος) body (physical)
Τ
8 τέ ...τέ and, likewise, and so
5 τό τέκνον child, descendant
5 τηρέω I keep, guard, observe
9 τίθημι / ἔθηκα I put, place; make / I placed (a “k” aorist)
4 τις (τινος) / [τι] someone, anyone / [something, anything]
4 τίς (τίνος) / [τί] who? / [what?] which?; [why?]
8 τοιοῦτος, –οῦτον, –αύτη such as this, such a kind
8 ὁ τόπος place
7 τότε then
8 τρεῖς, τρία three
6 τυφλός, –ον ,–η blind
Υ
4 τό ὕδωρ (ὕδατος) water
3 ὁ υἱός son
5 ὕμεις you (second pers. pro. pl.)
8 ὑπάγω I depart, withdraw
8 ὑπάρχω I exist, am present; (τά ὑπάρχοντα: possessions)
6 ὑπέρ gen: in/on behalf of; acc: above, beyond
6 ὑπό gen: by; acc: under
Φ
8 φέρω I bear
8 φημί I say
6 φοβέομαι I fear, am afraid
3 φωνή, ἡ sound, noise, voice, language
4 τό φῶς (φωτός) light
Χ
7 χαίρω I rejoice
5 ἡ χαρά joy
4 ἡ χάρις (χάριτος) grace, favor, kindness
4 ἡ χείρ (χειρός) hand, arm, finger
3 ὁ χρόνος time
Ψ
8 ἡ ψυχή person, nature (versus spirit)
Ω
6 ὧδε here
3 ἡ ὣρα hour, moment
8 ὡς as
3 ὧστε therefore, so that
198 Index
See Appendix K (pages 168-173) 2 Aorist tense · 49

2 aorist is a “copycat” tense · 52
A 2 aorist vocabulary · 72
Accent marks · 7-8 regular and irregular · 52
acute · 8 Application of the tense identifiers · 62
circumflex · 8 Augment · 50-51
grave · 8
Accusative · 17, 109, 113 B
Accusative of General Reference · 96, 109 Basic syntax
Active voice · 18, 50, 61, 63, 64, 82 accusative of general reference · 109-
110
Active voice participle · 37, 76
conditional sentences · 110-112
formation · 78
exercises taken from Appendix H · 112
translating · 80
genitive absolute · 108
Acute accent · 7, 8
Breathing marks · 5, 9, 10
Adjective · 14, 26
rough · 10
attributive use · 29
smooth · 10
predicative use · 29
Adverb · 14, 68, 73
C
Alphabet · 2-5
Case · 24
false friends · 4, 5
nominative · 17
Aorist · 78
genitive · 17
Aorist passive builds on active voice · 63,
dative · 17
76, 97
accusative · 17
Aorist passive participle · 25 (fn), 37, 63,
76 English examples of “case” · 17
Aorist tense · 51, 88 Circumflex accent · 7, 8, 66
Index 199
Conditional sentences ·110-112 First and Second declension endings ·
23
assumed fulfilled · 111
First declension 18
impossible fulfillment · 111
four variations in the endings · 27
probable fulfillment · 111
Second declension · 18
remotely possible fulfillment · 112
Third declension · 18
Conjugation · 18
Definite article · 20, 26
mode · 18
helps identify unusual spelling · 41
number · 18
Dentals (τ, δ, θ) · 35, 166
person · 18
Deponent verbs
tense · 18
definition · 60
voice · 18
vocabulary · 57
Conjunctions · 14
Diphthong · 6
Continual / Linear action
versus Point action · 93
E
Contract verbs · 65-67
“ε” augment · 50
contraction occurs only in the present
and imperfect tenses · 65 before a vowel or diphthong · 51
Copycat tense · 52-53, 60, 98 Eight derived verb forms · 62-63
table showing the “copy” aspect · 98 Endings of the first/second declensions ·

25
Endings of the third declension · 36, 79
D
Dative · 17 Exercise instructions · 30
Declensions · (15) 16-18

F
application in English · 16
False friends · 4, 5
each case’s function · 17
First declension · 23, 28
spelling patterns · 18, 34
200 Index
First, second, third declensions · 34 Iota stems · 35

For the curious · 28, 79 Iota subscript
Four basic verb forms · 49-50 always occurs in the dative singular in
the first and second declensions · 7
Functional name for the cases · 17
K
G
Kinds of time
Gender · 15
point and continuous · 88
Genitive · 17
Koine Greek
Genitive Absolute · 108, 109, 112
definitions · 2
Genitive plural
its importance · 2
-ων for all genders and declensions ·
24, 40
L
Grave accent · 7, 8
Labials, (π, β, φ) · 166
I Liquid verbs (λ μ ν ρ) · 35, 167

Imperative mode · 48, 87
2 person plural is identical to the 2
person plural of the indicative · 95 M
why Greek has two additional forms · –μι verb
94
characteristics · 104-105
why tense distinctions are crucial · 95
exercises · 106
Imperfect tense · 49
introduction · 102
Indicative mode · 47, 87
principle parts · 105
Indo–European languages · 2
Major parts of speech · 14
Infinitive · 53, 109
adjective · 14
all infinitives end with -ειν or -αι · 53,
96-97 adverb · 14
more information · 96 conjunction · 14

Index 201
noun · 14
participle · 14
preposition · 14 N
pronoun · 14 Neuter gender
verb · 14 nomnitives and accusatives are always

the same · 24-25, 38, 40, 80
Middle/passive voice participle · 81
genitive and dative cases are identical
Minimums to the masculine · 40
One: Endings of the First and Second pronouns drop the final ν · 30
declensions · 25
Neuter –ματ nouns · 34
Two: Endings of the Third declension
Nominative · 17
· 37
Noun · 14, 26
Application to two nouns · 38-40
Number · 18, 48
Three: Four Basic Verb Forms · 49-51
Four: Tense Identifiers · 61
P
Five: Eight Derived Verb Forms · 62
Palatals (γ, κ, χ) · 36, 166
Six-A: Participle of ειμι · 76-77
Parse · 18
Six-B: Middle/Passive voice participle
Participle · 14, 75-83
· 81-83
as a masculine substantive · 83
Seven-A: Subjunctive mode · 90-92
basic steps to form the active voice · 80
Seven-B: Imperative mode · 93-95
basic steps to form the middle/passive
Eight: -μι verb · 103 voice · 81
Mode · 18, 47, 87-88 definition · 75
imperative · 48, 87 exercises in tense recognition · 84
indicative · 47, 87 introduction · 75
subjunctive · 47, 87-92 nominative case
formation is often unpredictable · 78
202 Index
tense formations · 82 S
translating · 82 Second declension · 23
Participle of ειμι ·37, 76, 77, 82, 90 masculine and neuter have the same
form in the genitives and datives · 40
Person · 18, 48
neuter accusatives are the same as the
Personal pronoun uses · 28 nominatives · 40
Point action Smooth breathing marks · 10
versus linear or continual · 93 Subjunctive mode · 47, 87
Preposition · 14 formation · 89
vocabulary · 59 Subjunctive of ειμι · 90
Present tense · 49 Syllable division · 8
Pronoun · 14, 26 application of rule · 9
Pronunciation · 6-10
accent marks · 7 T
acute · 8 Tense · 18, 47
circumflex · 8 1 Aorist · 52
grave · 8
2 Aorist · 52
diphthong · 6 exercises on tense recognition · 83
practice · 12 imperfect · 49
syllable division · 7-9 present · 49
primary and secondary · 50
R
Tense identifiers · 61
Regular and irregular verbs · 52
application · 62
Remember this · 24, 25, 52, 60, 81
importance · 61
Rough breathing marks · 10
Index 203
Tense in the indicative mode V
graphic portrayal · 48 Verb · 14, 46-49
Third declension Verb “to be”
endings · 37 requires the nominative case on both
sides of the verb · 36, 90
examples of the declension · 38
Vocabulary · 10
introduction · 34
building · 10-12
dative singular also has an iota ending
but is not subscripted as in the first use of brackets around neuter pro-
and second declensions · 40 nouns and adjectives, Greek and
English · xiii, 20
stem is given in the genitive singular ·
34 memorizing techniques xiv-xv
Time understanding the entries · 20
graphic portrayal · 48 Introduction · xiii
point and continuous · 88 Vocative case · 24, 67
Translation Voice · 18, 47
working with an unprepared passage
· 106

Greek

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Greek

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Greek

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Read Greek in 30 Days (or less): New Testament, Old Testament, Apocrypha, Philo, Church

© Copyright 2000, 2002, 2006 and 2011 by W. Larry Richards

Publisher: Breakthrough Books Company, Berrien Springs, Michigan 49103

Printer: Patterson Printing, Benton Harbor, MI

Publisher’s Website: www.breakthrubooks.com

Layout: Thomas Toews

Suggestions for Study

t Forms: Follow the same suggestions on memorizing mentioned for vocabulary.

PART ONE: Koine Greek and Its Importance

PART TWO: The Greek Alphabet

PART THREE: Comparisons with the English Alphabet

PART FOUR: Pronunciation

The Accent Mark and Syllable

The Breathing Mark

PART FIVE: Vocabulary Building

PART SIX: Exercises

1 John 1:1 Ὃ ἦν ἀπ᾿ ἀρχῆς, ὃ ἀκηκόαμεν, ὃ ἑωράκαμεν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν,

PART ONE: The Major Parts of Speech

PART THREE: Declension.

PART FOUR: Conjugation

PART FIVE: Parse

PART ONE: Vocabulary

ἀπό gen: (away) from [apostasy—to fall from; apocrypha—

PART TWO: The Endings of the First and Second Declensions

MASCULINE NEUTER FEMININE10

PART THREE: The Definite Article “the.”

A Helpful Note About the Endings of the First Declension

For the Curious

PART FOUR: Helpful Notes on the Personal Pronoun:

The Translation of Adjectives: Attributive or Predicative

PART SIX: Exercises

Instruction for All Exercises in the Book

1. τοῖς ἀγγέλοις τῷ κόσμῳ

2. οἱ ἄνθρωποι τῆς Γαλιλαίας

4. βλέπω τοὺς ἀποστόλους τοὺς ἀγαθούς-- λέγουσιν (they are speaking)

5. ἡ δόξα τοῦ θεοῦ

6. ἄλλος προφήτης τῆς δόξης

8. ἐγὼ βλέπω τὸν Χριστὸν τῆς δόξης

10. αὐτὸ ἀγαθόν

11. ἐγώ λέγω τῷ Πέτρῳ

13. ἀγαθὸς αὐτὸς ὁ ἄγγελος, ἀγαθοὶ αὐτοὶ οἱ ἄγγελοι

14. ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄγγελος αὐτός

15. ὁ ἀπόστολος ὁ ἀγαθὸς λέγει ([he] is speaking) τῷ καιρῷ τῷ ἀγαθῷ

2. οὗτοι οἱ ἀγαθοὶ προφήται τῆς βασιλείας

3. τῷ λόγῳ τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ οὐκ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ τοῦ ἄλλου ἀγγέλου

4. νῦν λέγω τοὺς λόγους τῆς ζωῆς τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς προφῆταις ἐν τῷ

5. ἔχω τὸ εὐαγγέλιον αὐτοῖς

6. ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ θεοῦ

7. ἡ ἐξουσία τοῦ κυρίου

8. ἐγὼ βλέπω τὸν Χριστὸν τῷ οὐρανῷ καὶ τῷ κόσμῳ.

9. τοῦτο ἔργον ἀγαθόν

10. ἡ ἁμαρτία οὐκ ἔστιν (it is) ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ

12. ὁ θεὸς ἀγάπη

13. Ἰησοῦς κύριος καὶ Χριστός

14. ἡ βασιλεία τῆς δόξης καὶ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ

Did You Know….

PART ONE: Introduction to the Third Declension

PART TWO: Vocabulary